Home

manual - SWS, a.s.

1. 173 ANNE SC CIO PH TCR a a E N DNE A A dust E cub UD dd 177 Enviar NAT scncinsinininnsrscni 189 Dynami DNS sirina er rare aT rye mie en re re ree ener rere Tr Terre Tr rer circ errr 197 r5 ERREUR LEE NET 199 MAG FIGE T 205 Pare ite nO M 207 ROUTAN c TM 211 pole 219 Ere m EE TEM 243 Bruins que 247 dori cro T A 253 PRAT E er T Pr 255 PSU PAN ta so E tac np acct we cates as E deep ees ate eae ge ae 257 En e ups PEE E 259 Eusko git EE 261 miu i8 Se 263 ste T ejl elc a a TE A A T t T susdodsedatsus rs AA 265 Russ eWem m t M T EN 269 Tipp ODD assiste eed Debo nU erry tr a A Ce e DDR ER t ad Reb et eer er err 273 lis efus oe oap PRENNENT TT or etre resent etn Tn 281 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 9 Contents Overview P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This User s QuId amp oce uio iicsasentusi os Vsc n pe pGP RD ser rEcR SP Pa inaaianei 3 Document Conventions a oaoscs eee eee co rote u su ecepr tas accus sannana Ee scc dac aPeDi C DER NE MS DA D NA GSRAD NS PR CF ERAN 5 er aN a e Ser T eect T Gonienis Overview ccor ccs soca Ra DU 2s cmc ND SS NI
2. seeseeseeeeeeee 299 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions sssusss 329 ceca MESSI I P 339 Bp E XBNMIBOD SE VIE autista een anes Ce denied oa cu e odd hd 359 ss pop d Je 363 Appendix G Open Software Announcements sessssssseeeeeeeeeere nennen 375 Append MESE Gc ein ERE oet 411 lj o R 9 415 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide PART I User s Guide Introduction 1 1 Overview The Device is a VDSL ADSL and Ethernet WAN router which also includes Voice over IP Vol P communication capabilities to allow you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls By integrating all of these features you are provided with ease of installation and high speed shared Internet access The Device is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall based on Stateful Packet Inspection SPI technology and Denial of Service DoS Please refer to the following description of the product name format H denotes an integrated 4 port hub switch N denotes wireless functionality including 802 11n mode There is an embedded mini PCI module for IEEE 802 11 b g n wireless LAN connectivity U denotes a USB port used to set up a 3G WAN connection via a 3G wireless card o
3. 265 OSA E T ir T OT TTD a nacre Sa 265 Boe Th Backup SIONS SCRE DR Meedteeadieads 265 25 9 The BEBOBL IDEST n cierra pron A aas Loo iata vcr E Eo e Pa etant 267 Chapter 26 n E 269 ZO I OVI QIBBE cocdeceetonissetii ed sese epa phim ree des LUE NR I ADM LIS RI CEDERE DE 269 262 The Pince TrscePipule SEEE i arses eDU pa ien ecc reor Gal OU E aut RU D OA A 269 26 3 The DSL Dne Soren uius caras sas tco renum tama uai bm e Kk ded dose rede xU ES diui x aa RU R NARA 270 Chapter 27 lieri ihe 273 EFAEEU SS Ee IET 273 27 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS eese een nar kar a ken kann ek ann nant daa 273 l Dove aeos Bd OON euuissstbisiestoiuidd esae os eUit ist Ebee dU PSU REeDU d RO REN acne DuUdaR Ee junds 274 POR CEDAR AC NETTE TT TET EET 276 27 5 Wireless Internet ACCESS aie cecus e aanu reru dan ku rccunsRr Re iX MR Rau LEER ew DECR Rena dE 278 270 Phone Cals sm VolP accepi cisco t eR EORR A omae bep Lco r La dni COSE od B Rde Rt Goods 279 27 7 USB Device Conme DD ueniet ated eet b xxr E ERR e E E Rep n CES de az E andan 279 EIPAIDHP uu cd uA I uu D c ee pe Tn Stehe PRY 279 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 28 arolia ke seitei or eM 281 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subriatling uiiui iicet inte deinde eee 289 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address
4. EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integri
5. P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 175 Chapter 8 Routing 176 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Quality of Service QoS 9 1 Overview This chapter discusses the Device s QoS screens Use these screens to set up your Device to use QoS for traffic management Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth QoS allows the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video Note The Device has built in configurations for Voice over IP IP The Quality of Service QoS feature does not affect VoIP traffic See Section 9 6 on page 187 for adva
6. dd Music Library Songs Create Auto Playlist El gt Playlists Album rj Create Playlist Aaron Goldberg Music E fd Library E Pictures 9 Artist Worlds MES x C Album Aaron Goldberg Recorded TV d Songs Jazz Other Genre 2006 Year Add to Lib Apply Media Information ange Add Favorites to List When Dragging Quiet Songs Aisha Duo Jazz 2005 More Options Help with Using the Library 2 Check Find media that others are sharing in the following screen and click OK Media Sharing 21x Mu Find and share music pictures and video on your network u Leam about sharing Online Share my media o uid beige hired is a private network Devices that you allow can eo How does shari firewall settings L atk P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 In the Library screen check the left panel The Windows Media Player should detect the Device E windows Media Player Library ee Music P2812HNU F1 gt El gt Playlists Titi gt j Create Playlist El Jd Library D Artist Album 4 Songs Genre s a A 4 Artist 2 Album d Songs Genre E Year ve Rating i Playlists Parental Rating Contributing Artist Composer Online Stores Year gt y Rating Playlists The Device displays as a playlist Clicking on the category icons in th
7. E Acrobat Reader 4 0 My Computer Tour Windows xP a Windows Movie Maker e Control Panel tg Printers and Faxes Q9 Help and Support pP Search All Programs gt 177 Run B Log Off Io Turn OFF Computer untitled Paint In the Control Panel click the Network Connections icon Figure 146 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help OQ Bacl d P Search 4 Folders E Address gt Control Panel Vg Control Panel A Qe Switch to Category view See Also Game A Windows Update Controllers P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 147 Windows XP Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Properties ocal Area Connection Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Figure 148 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 4 Local Area Connection Properties PIR General Authentication Advanced 1 Connect using Hi Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter This connection uses the following items Il Client for Microsoft Networks File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks m c Internet Protocol TCP IP Description
8. 1 Make sure the Device is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the Device off and on 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 6 on page 24 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 273 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Turn the Device off and on 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor 27 3 Device Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Device 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the Device it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 26 forgot t
9. 4 The Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Call Hold Call Waiting Making a Second Call Call Transfer Three Way Conference Internal Calls Do not Disturb Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the Device s phone ports you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time a few hundred milliseconds before releasing it On newer telephones there should be a flash key button that generates the signal electronically If the flash key is not available you can tap press and immediately release the hook by hand to achieve the same effect However using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise With manual tapping if the duration is too long it may be interpreted as hanging up by the Device You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command time out 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted
10. IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the I Pv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon hexadecimal notation P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 11 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 6to4 Tunneling Select 6to4 if the Device is connected to a network that has both IPv6 and IPv4 and the IPv4 addresses are public IP addresses In this mode the Device can convert an IPv4 address directly to an IPv6 address The format is 2002 IPv4 address in hexadecimal 48 If you select this option the fields shown in Figure 26 appear 6RD Enable Select this option to enable IPv6 Rapid Deployment By enabling this function the Device uses an ISP s IPv6 address prefix instead of the 2002 48 prefix The operational domain of 6RD is limited to and controlled by the ISP s network 6RD hosts are ensured to be reachable from all native IPv6 addresses as 6RD only uses relay servers within control of the ISP This option is not available if your WAN Service Type is PPPoE or PPPoA 6to4 Tunneling Relay Server IP Enter the tunneling relay server s IPv4 address in this field If your WAN Service Type is PPPoE or PPPOA you need to enter this field in order to use 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Select whether you want to obtain the IPv6 DNS server addresses automatically or configure them manually Obtain IPv6 DNS info
11. Provider Name Selection configure in this screen If you change this field the screen automatically refreshes General SIP Service Select this if you want the Device to use this SIP provider Clear it if you do not Provider want the Device to use this SIP provider SIP Service Enter the name of your SIP service provider SIP Local Port Enter the Device s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value SIP Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value REGISTER Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Server Port Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field SIP Service Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the Domain
12. l Host Name router Model Name P 2812HNUL F1 MAC Address 00 13 49 11 66 8f VOSL WAN NIA Firmware Version 3 10 TUJ 0 b1 LA 1000Mbps WAN 1 Information VDSL WAN 1 L2 NIA Mode IPoE LAN3 NIA IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask 300Mbps LAN Information Disabled N A IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server DHCPv6 Server WLAN Information DSL Up Time Channel 11 System Up Time 1 day 6 01 WPS Status Unconfigured Current Date Time Sun Jan 2 07 01 14 CET 2000 SSID1 Information System Resource SSID ZyXEL 668C CPU Usage Status On Security Mode WPA2 PSK mixed Memory Usage SSID2 Information SSID ZyXEL 668D Status Security Mode WPA2 PSK mixed SSID3 Information SSID yXEL 6 Type Status 0 Storage Security Mode WPA2 PS Printer SSID4 Information SSID Status Interface Rate Connection Status As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts A title bar B main window C navigation panel 2 2 1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner Click this icon to log out of the web configurator 2 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen the System Info screen is displayed See Chapter 4 on page 83 for more information about the System Info sc
13. End Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above Translation Start Port This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Translation End Port This shows the last port of the translated port range Server IP Address Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Protocol Type Select the protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Table 47 Port Forwarding Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 10 3 The Sessions Screen Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client can use Click Network Setting NAT Sessions to display the following screen Figure 85 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions MAX NAT Sessions Per Host 048 512 20480 Bee caca The
14. IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN DHCP Server This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN None The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN DHCPv6 Server This field displays what DHCPv6 services the Device is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The Device is a DHCPv6 server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The Device acts as a surrogate DHCPv6 server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None The Device is not providing any DHCPv6 services to the LAN WLAN Information Channel This is the channel number used by the Device now WPS Status Configured displays when a wireless client has connected to the Device or WPS is enabled and wireless or wireless security settings have been configured Unconfigured displays if WPS is disabled or wireless security settings have not been configured SSID 1 4 Information SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in the wireless LAN Status This shows whether or not the SSID is enabled on Security Mode This displays the type of security the Device is using in the wireless LAN Interface Status Interface T
15. Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Traffic Status Table 76 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bytes Sent This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Bytes Received This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Sent Packet Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Received Packet Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface 18 4 The NAT Status Screen Click System Monitor Traffic Status NAT to open the following screen You can view the NAT status of the Device s client s in this screen Figure 118 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT Refresh interval l 5 seconds z 142 twpc13774 02 192 168 158 00 24 21 7e 20 96 Total 142 The follow
16. Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 57 Chapter 3 Tutorials 8 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard x Additional Port Information Required RS The device could not be identified _ The device is not found on the network Be sure that 1 The device is tumed on 2 The network is connected 3 The device is properly configured 4 The address on the previous page is correct If you think the address is not correct click Back to return to the previous page Then correct the address and perfor another search on the network If you are sure the address is correct select the device type below Device Type C Standard Generic Network Card F lt Back Cancel 9 Confirm the IP address of the Device in the IP Address field 10 Select Raw under Protocol 11 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100 Click OK onfigure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor 2 x Port Settings Port Name IP 192 158 1 1 Printer Name or IP Address fi 92 168 1 1 M Protocol Port Number 9100 r LPR Settings Gueue Name l F LPR Byte Counting Enabled rT SNMP Status Enabled Community Name fic Ss SNMP Device Indes fi P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 12 Continue through the wizard apply your settings and close the wizard window x Ad
17. Syslog Setting Syslog Logging Syslog Server UDP Port Active Log and Select Level Log Category VoIP VolP Call Statistics M VoIP SIP Call Signaling M VolP SIP Registrations I VolP Phone Event voIP Misc System WAN DHCP I xDSL ETHER r System Maintenance T Remote Management TR 069 I NTP I DDNS NAT Attack C Enable Disable 0 0 0 0 IP Address B14 Serer Port Log Level ALL hd ALL hd ALL b ALL E ALL he p ALL i ALL ALL I P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 23 Log Setting The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 84 Maintenance gt Log Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Setting Syslog Logging The Device sends a log to an external syslog server Select the Enable check box to enable syslog logging Syslog Server Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server Active Log and Select Level Log Category Select the categories of logs that you want to record Log Level Select the severity level of logs that you want to record If you want to record all logs select ALL Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Firmware Upgrade 24 1 Overv
18. Use Static IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address Address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Routing Feature NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Default Gateway Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway DNS Server The section is not available when you select Bridge in the WAN Service Type field Obtain DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure Static DNS IP manually Address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server Secondary DNS Server Enter the second
19. 3 9 Configuring the MAC Address Filter Thomas noticed that his daughter J osephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams Josephine s computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the Device Thomas decides to use the Security MAC Filter screen to grant wireless network access to his computer but not to Josephine s computer Thomas yx 1 Click Security gt MAC Filter to open the MAC Filter screen Select the Enable check box to activate MAC filter function Josephine 2 Find the MAC address of Thomas computer in this screen Select Allow Click Apply MAC Address Filter Enable C Disable 1 2 r 3 r 4 Dn 5 n 6 Oo ee eee 31 r 32 r B Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network Apy Cancel Thomas can also grant access to the computers of other members of his family and friends However Josephine and others not listed in this screen will no longer be able to access the Internet through the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 10 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions you may connect a router to the Device s LAN The router may be used to separate two department networks
20. 5 2 1 5 Routing IPoE ADSL Click the Add new WAN I nterface in the Network Setting Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select ADSL as the interface type Routing as the encapsulation mode and I P over Ethernet as the WAN service type Figure 25 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE ADSL General Name Type Mode WANServiceType IPv6 IPv4 DualStack ATM PVC Configuration VPI 0 255 VCI 32 65535 DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode Service Category Peak Cell Rate cells s Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Maximum Burst Size cells IP Address Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor Class Identifier StaticIP Address IP Address SubnetMask GatewaylPAddress C Obtain an IP Address Automatically Routing Feature ADSL NAT Enable r Routing IGMP Proxy Enable r IP over Ethernet ixl Apply as Default Gateway n Enable v DNS Server E Obtain DNS info Automatically Be Use the following Static DNS IP Address Primary DNS Server EoA ml Secondary DNS Server LLC SNAP BRIDGING Non Realtime VBR vj IPv6 Address C Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically Enable Prefix Delegation r Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address Prefix length 64 IPv6 Default Gateway Iv oo 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 TIT Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically 7 Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Primary IPv6 DNS Server Secondary IPv6
21. Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Figure 155 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties Q Local Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using La Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items i o Client for Microsoft Networks vi dl Network Monitor3 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks et Protocol Version 4 TCPAPy4 Mil Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver ivi Install Uninstall Description across diverse interconnected networks M Properties J Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens 9 Figure 156 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties EA General alternate Confi
22. Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE 322 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click K Menu Computer Administrator Settings YaST Figure 182 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu 9v san ICR E Administrator Settings ES Applications J Install Software e System Information Home Folder 2 My Documents rv Network Folders lt System Folders Media 2 4G Media 2 0 GB available g Eavorites Applications Computer History User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Figure 183 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Run as root KDE su lt Please enter the Administrator root password to continue Command sbin yast2 Password Ignore 3 Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 323 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 o YaST Control Center linux h20z K File Edit Help E System M Network Devices al Network Services 49 Novell AppArmor 9 vv Me Miscellaneous Search 4 Security and Users When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon Figure 184 openSUSE 10 3 YaST Contro
23. Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks X 4 C Show icon in notification area when connected P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 301 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens 7 8 Figure 149 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCPAIP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically C Use the following DNS server addresses Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window Click OK to close the Local Area Connection
24. When the Device does not have power only the phone connected to the PHONE port1 can be used for making calls Ensure you know which phone this is so that in case of emergency you can make outgoing calls Use the FXO screen to set up the PSTN line you use to make regular phone calls which do not use the Internet To access this screen click VoIP gt FXO Figure 108 VoIP gt FXO Pre Fix For FXO Outgoing Call Pre Fix Number o000 Voice Features IV Active G 168 Echo Cancellation Active VAD Voice Active Detector Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 68 VoIP gt FXO LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Fix For FXO Outgoing Call Pre Fix Number Enter 1 7 numbers you dial before you dial the phone number if you want to make a regular phone call while one of your SIP accounts is registered These numbers tell the Device that you want to make a regular phone call Voice Features Active G 168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice Echo reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Cancellation Active VAD Select this if the Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking Voice Active This reduces the bandwidth the Device uses Detector Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 16 10 Technical Reference This section contains
25. eoe _ Network Utility Info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan Please erface for information _ Network Interface enO B Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e Sent Packets 20607 IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Mb Recv Packets 22626 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Marvell Collisions 0 Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Mac OS X 10 5 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 170 Mac OS X 10 5 Apple Menu Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software p ES System Preferences Lu UO gt Recent Items b Force Quit X38 Sleep Restart Shut Down 2 n System Preferences click the Network icon Security E Spotlight E Sound Figure 171 Mac OS X 10 5 Systems Preferences System Preferences Personal c ww M B Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp International Screen Saver Spaces Hardware P3 4 V i CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Saver Mouse Internet amp N Mac QuickTime Sharing System f LY u c e 9 i Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Controls Update Universal Access Startup Disk Time Machine
26. F Serice FTP M E Exclude Aoply Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Class Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Active Select to enable this classifier Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable English keyboard characters including spaces Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 43 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forward to Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out Interface If you select Unchange the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box in Criteria Configuration Basic section If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Unchange the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1p Mark Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the Device keep the 802 1p priority field in the packets To Queue Select a queue that appl
27. If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it 4 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The P 2812HNU L Fx Series may be referred to as the Device the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold
28. Management Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue kbps Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the queue Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 9 3 1 Add Edit a QoS Queue Use this screen to configure a queue Click Add new queue in the Queue Setup screen or the Edit icon next to an existing queue Figure 78 Queue Setup Add Edit Active Name Interface wan e Priority 1 Low vj Weight 1 xj Rate Limit kbps Aon Bec The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Queue Setup Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Interface This shows the interface of this queue Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 7 of this queue The larger the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 15 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues
29. QoS Quality of Service You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the Device PPPoE Support PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up RFC2516 connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers Multiple PVC Your device supports up to 7 Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs by default Permanent Virtual Circuits Support VDSL Standards COMPLIANCE e G 993 2 including Amendments 1 4 and Corrigendum 1 2 e WT114 revision 14 released 2009 01 14 loop reach e WT115 revision 7 released 2009 02 09 functionality e TPS TC function PTM mode e G993 2 clause 7 2 UPBO upstream power back off e G993 2 clause 12 3 US mask ceiling by using MAXMASKus e VDSL G 993 1 e G hs G 994 1 e G 997 1 e LR VDSL2 ADSL Standards COMPLIANCE e ADSL 2 2 e G 992 5 ADSL2 backward compatible with G 992 1 ADSL G dmt Germany Annex B J G 992 5 Annex B ADSL ove
30. SIP Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device Registration This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You can change this in the Status screen Registered The SIP account is registered with a SIP server Not Registered The last time the Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The Device automatically tries to register the SI P account when you turn on the Device or when you activate it Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account Last This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP account The Registration field is blank if you never successfully registered this account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens Message Waiting This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account Last Incoming This field displays the last number that called the SIP account The field is blank if Number no number has ever dialed the SIP account Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called The field is blank if the Number SI P account has never dialed a number Call Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Traff
31. SS Da IAD IAD 7 WPS HANDSHAKE x C eo 5 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL mm SECURITY INFO f 7 COMMUNICATION SY 3y 77 The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to
32. Use the MAC Filter screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device To change your Device s MAC filter settings click Security gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 91 Security gt MAC Filter MAC Address Filter C Enable Disable set wo MAC Address N 00 24 21 7E 20 96 29 m 30 O 31 m 32 O B Note Only devices listed here are granted access to the network coca P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 13 MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 53 Security gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Select Enable to activate MAC address filtering Filter Set This is the index number of the MAC address Allow Select Allow to permit access to the Device MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the Device If you clear this the MAC Address field for this set clears MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station and LAN devices that are allowed access to the Device in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 14 1 Overview Parental Control Parental control allows you to block web sites with t
33. z ES Chapter 7 Home Networking Each field is described in the following table Table 32 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Configuration File Sharing Select Enable to activate file sharing through the Device Services SMB Add new share Click this to set up a new share on the Device Select the check box to make the share available to the network Otherwise clear this Status This shows whether or not the share is available for sharing Share Name This field displays the share name on the Device Share Path This field displays the path for the share directories folders on the Device These are the directories folders on your USB storage device Share Description This field displays information about the share Modify Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing share Click the Delete icon to delete this share in the list Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 5 2 Add Edit File Sharing Use this screen to set up a new share or edit an existing share on the Device Click Add new share in the File Sharing screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing share Figure 54 File Sharing Add Edit Volume GENERIC USB Mass Storage 100 1 im Share Path Browse Description Apply Back Each field
34. 9 symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters RTP Port Range Start Port Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic if your VolP service provider gave you this information Otherwise keep the default values End Port To enter one port number enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields To enter a range of ports enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field DTMF Mode Control how the Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons You should use the same mode your VoIP service provider uses RFC2833 send the DTMF tones in RTP packets PCM send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 and G 726 can distort the tones SIP INFO send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Transport Type Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol UDP or TCP usually UDP used for SIP FAX Option This field controls how the Device handles fax messages G711 Fax Select this if the Device should use G 711 to send fax messages The peer Passthrough devices must also use G 711 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 60 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRI
35. CANON PIXMA MP730 CANON PIXMA MP780 CANON PIXMA MP830 CANON PI XUS ip2500 CANON PIXMA ip4200 CANON PIXMA ip5000 CANON PIXUS 990i EPSON CX3500 EPSON CX3900 EPSON EPL 5800 EPSON EPL 6200L EPSON LP 2500 EPSON LP 8900 EPSON RX 510 EPSON RX 530 EPSON Stylus 830U EPSON Stylus 1270 EPSON Stylus C43UX EPSON Stylus C60 EPSON Stylus Color 670 HP Deskjet 5550 HP Deskjet 5652 HP Deskjet 830C HP Deskjet 845C HP Deskjet 1125C HP Deskjet 1180C P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 36 Compatible USB Printers continued BRAND MODEL HP Deskjet 1220C HP Deskjet F4185 HP Laserjet 1022 HP Laserjet 1200 HP Laserjet 2200D HP Laserjet 2420 HP Color Laserjet 1500L HP Laserjet 3015 HP Officejet 4255 HP Officejet 5510 HP Officejet 5610 HP Officejet 7210 HP Officejet Pro L7380 HP Photosmart 2610 HP Photosmart 3110 HP Photosmart 7150 HP Photosmart 7830 HP Photosmart C5280 HP Photosmart D5160 HP PSC 1350 HP PSC 1410 IBM Infoprint 1332 LEXMARK Z55 LEXMARK Z705 OKI B4350 SAMSUNG ML 1710 SAMSUNG SCX 4016 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 9 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click
36. Change adapter settings p See full map TW PC ZyXEL com Internet Change advanced sharing This computer tti I r Egs View your active networks Connect or disconnect ZyXEL com Access type Internet Jo Work network Connections Local Area Connection P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 160 Windows 7 Local Area Connection Status QU gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this A Local Area Connection A Wireless Network Connection i E Unidentified network gt ZyXEL_R 4 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth ifl 802 11n Wire 4 Local Area Connection Status General g l Connection IPv4 Connectivity No network access IPv6 Connectivity No network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Activity d Sent A a Received Packets 432 0 Properties Disable Jl Diagnose Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Figure 161 Win
37. General WPS AP PIN Status 802 11 Mode SSID Security B Note Add a new device with WPS Method f Method 1 PBC Method 2 PIN ware Step 1 Enter the PIN of your new wireless client device and then Step 1 Click WPS button WPS dick Register Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client Enter PIN here Register device within 120 seconds WPS Configuration Summary This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security mode is configured Enable C Disable Step 2 Press the WPS button on your new wireless client device within 120 seconds 11403647 Generate New PIN Not Configured Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WPS Select Enable to activate WPS on the Device Add a new device w ith WPS Method Method 1 PBC Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration PBC WPS Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the Device to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button Method 2 PIN Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering
38. Maximum key length supported is up to 4096 bits default is 2048 bits and the initialization time is proportional to key length You need to adjust your application timeout settings to adapt this variation Replace Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION WebServer Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to e
39. P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Figure 172 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet eoo Network Internal Modem Q e Not Connected ed Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but e PPPoE your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Ethernet i s P UR TERI Configure Using DHCP HA e FireWire Not Connected AirPort e Off DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 o M id Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings 5 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure list select Manually In the IP Address field enter your IP address In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address n the Router field enter the IP address of your Device Figure 173 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet eo b 1 Location Automatic rs Internal Modem Q e Not Connected Status Not Connected PPPoE The cable for Ethernet is connected but e EA Qe your computer does not have an IP address Ethernet Not Connected Configure Manually i FireWire o IP Address 0 0 0 0 e Not Conn
40. Pre Shared Key fi 2MyVPAPSkKpresharedkey34 Back Next Exit P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EB Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 7 10 In the next screen leave both boxes selected Wireless Protocol Settings v 802 11b v 802 11g Back Next Exit Verify the profile settings in the read only screen Click Save to save and go to the next screen Network Name SSID SSID Example3 Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11b g Channel Auto Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately Otherwise click the Activate Later button If you clicked Activate Later you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it Note Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time 0 Your network has been configured successfully Activate Now Activate Later When you activate the new profile the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection Open your Internet browser enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER If you are able to access the web site your new profile is successfully configured
41. Public and Private Keys When using public key cryptology for authentication each host has two keys One key is public and can be made openly available the other key is private and must be kept secure Public key encryption in general works as follows 1 Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny Tim generates a public private key pair What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other 2 Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available 3 Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to Jenny 4 Jenny receives the message and uses Tim s public key to decrypt it 5 Additionally Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses J enny s public key to decrypt the message P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 2n Chapter 15 Certificates The Device uses certificates based on public key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection For example a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates Certification Path A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate The Device does not trust a cert
42. Pure ftpd libpcap and tcpdump under the license by BSD BSD Copyright c dates as appropriate to package The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTI AL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING
43. Service Provider ISP to configure the Device Do the following steps Connect the Device properly Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on the Device s hardware connection Connect one end of a DSL cable to the DSL port of your Device The other end should be connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router modem provided by your ISP Connect one end of Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the Device and the other end to a computer that you will use to access the web configurator Connect the Device to a power source turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a steady green Turn on the modem provided by your ISP as well as the computer Account Configuration Click Network Setting Broadband to open the Broadband screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 35 Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Select ADSL as your WAN mode type and click Switch WAN Interface Switch WAN Mode Type ADSL v Switch WAN Interface Add new WAN Interface Internet Setup 1 EtherW EtherW Routing IPoE Disable N A N A N A N A Enabled Enabled Yes ZW 2 AdslW ADSL Routing IPoE Disable 8 35 N A N A Enabled Enabled Yes ZW 3 VdslW VDSL Routing IPoE Disable N A N A N A N A Enabled Enabled Yes ZW 3 Confirm your selection and wait for the Device to reboot 4 Log into the Device again and go to the Network Setting gt Broadband screen Click Add new WAN Interface 5 For this example the interface type
44. TCP UnChange UnChange UnChange Active user ZW Destination Port 8080 Ether Type IP m HTTPS Protocol TCP UnChange UnChange UnChange Active user 4 i Destination Port 443 Ether Type IP a 6 F LAN or WLAN TCP po Protocol TCP UnChange UnChange UnChange Slow 4 Destination Port 1024 n Ether Type IP ri LAN or WLAN UDP po Protocol UDP UnChange UnChange UnChange Slow W Destination Port 1024 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier Order This field displays the order number of the classifier Status This indicates whether the classifier is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active Class Name This is the name of the classifier Classification This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface from Criteria which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier Forward to This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is forwarded out DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1p Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue i
45. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings In the following figure router R is connected to the Device s LAN R connects to two networks N1 192 168 1 x 24 and N2 192 168 10 x 24 If you want to send traffic from computer A in N1 network to computer B in N2 network the traffic is sent to the Device s WAN default gateway by default In this case B will never receive the traffic INTERNEJ N2 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials You need to specify a static routing rule on the Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2 In this case the Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings frena EENE EP es ee ee 7 Table3 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE COMPUTER IP ADDRESS The Device s WAN 172 16 1 1 The Device s LAN 192 168 1 1 A 192 168 1 34 R s N1 192 168 1 253 R s N2 192 168 10 2 B 192 168 10 33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2 1 Click Network Setting gt Routing Click Add New Static Route Active Status MName Destination IP Gateway Subnet Mask Interface Modify 2 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings Select Active Specify a descriptive name for this routing rule Type 192 168 10 0 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0
46. continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Group Select the LAN WLAN port s from which traffic will be forwarded to the WAN interface directly Select a port from the Available LAN WLAN Port s list and click Add gt gt to add it to the Bridged LAN WLAN Port s list If you want to remove a port from the Bridged LAN WLAN Port s list select it and click Remove lt lt You cannot configure a QoS class for traffic from the LAN port which is selected here Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen If you select ADSL as the interface type the following screen appears Figure 28 Broadband Add Edit Bridge ADSL General Name Type Mode Bridge Group ATM PVC Configuration VPI 0 255 VCI 32 65535 Encapsulation Mode Service Category Peak Cell Rate cells s Maximum Burst Size cells Select LAN WLAN port s you wish to together with this WAN interface Available LAN WLAN Port s Sustainable Cell Rate cells s ADSL Bridge vj Bridged LAN WLAN Port s E Br LLCISNAP BRIDGING v Non Realtime VBR v The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 13 Broadband Add Edit Bridge ADSL LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select ADSL as the interface for which
47. ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer 1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer 2 After the installation is complete select Start gt All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPve6 gt Client I nstall as service 3 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 370 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 4 Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client i Services ile Action View Help Ea Bugs by Services Local YA cervices Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Start the service Description Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 This is DHCPv6 client version 0 7 2 IN Extended 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Properties Local Computer _ General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DHCPv amp Client Display name Dibbler a DHCPv amp client version 0 7 2 Path to executable Startup type Automatic Service status Stopped Lose from here Start parameters Sx cerca 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPV6 server Example Enabling IPv6 on Name Description DCOM Server Process Launcher Provides la M Sy Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Sa DNS Client Resolves a Ss Error Reporting Service Allows erro Sy Event Log Enables ev Sy Extensible Authent
48. it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a suc
49. static route is not active Status This shows whether the static route is currently in use or not A yellow bulb signifies that this static route is in use A gray bulb signifies that this static route is not in use Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the Device Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the Device 174 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Routing 8 2 1 Add Edit Static Route Click add new Static Route in the Routing screen or click the Edit icon next to a rule The following screen appears Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route Figure 75 Routing Add Edit Active Route Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Bound Interface v EtherWAN1 B Note The Destination IP Address and IP Subnet Mask fields must be matched e g host 255 255 255 255
50. that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the networ
51. you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with th
52. 3 gf gt SB Ramee E PPE A eR PP A A en ee ee E ere ee Pe a 33 CEBS 01 0 NR eee Kerr RE 23 3 2 eI Up rs aurca CON D 33 3 3 How To Setup a Wireless NOIWODN eccec cen rsen aaa racc n E hr acuta ERE Vou SUMUS 36 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EN Table of Contents 22 1 Example PSreiuelilii uuo eee ii ab pin aer Ph Dc Up ene 36 ERAP Me o MM MNT EN Tp RN 36 3 9 Configuring Tio Wireless Client suriris Maed cese eateries 38 3 5 selling UP NAT POrtPOPWeIFONo asstosain perci p bep Rib e en di abba aed are RUE p LARQI 43 go Fow o Maksa VOIP Coal Mem 44 3 5 1 VoIP Calls Wiha Registered SIP ACCOUN cccsccactece cn tuae ttn cannae aea 45 lt 0 LSI ihe File SIN FEAE scrinia UU UT 47 apodo Up File SPD irran er ERE QNI ben adden E EER 48 3 6 2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ssesssssseeseeenee 49 3 7 Using the Media Server Feature 12 2 eise cele ione cid nd a RAD E nR a RR UE EY aA MERE 49 371 Configuring Me DEVIGE M 50 Sue Using Windows Media FRYST 2a dieitur pua prO a UR er RUE B enr UR c d nr RD ud 50 27 3 Using a Digital Media CRON Met m E 53 28 Using Me Pan Serve Feall e e e a A ERARA 55 3 8 Configuring the MAC Address Filter iius eere centnm tta aai anno tRala 70 3 10 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network eeessseene 71 3 11 Gontiguring Cas Queus and Class Setup 2r et p mrt rh ee d it Pkt 73 ads Acess The Device Using DONG Lucie aiotaan ER E
53. Chapter 14 Parental Control Table 54 Parental Control gt Parental Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Website Block This shows whether the website block is configured If not None will be shown Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Add Click Add to create a new schedule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device 14 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites Figure 93 Add Edit Parental Control Rule Add new PCP x General Active Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User All Y Internet Access Schedule Day M Everyday M Monday M Tuesday M Wednesday M Thursday M Friday M Saturday M Sunday Time Start End 00 00 24 00 00 00 24 00 No access ff Authorized access Network Service Network Service Setting Block z selected service s Add new service Blocked Site URL Keyword son Apply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 55 Add Edit Parental Control Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to
54. D DHCP Option 77 enter the User Class Data which is a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets If you select VendorSpecificl ntro DHCP Option 125 enter the Enterprise Number of the software of the matched traffic and Vendor Class Data used by all the DHCP clients Service Select the service classification of the traffic Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 43 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 9 5 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the Device s QoS packet statistics click Network Setting QoS Monitor The screen appears as shown Figure 81 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh Status Interface Monitor 1 ptm0 3900 Queue Monitor 1 WAN_Default_Queue WAN 0 0 2 LAN_Default_Queue LAN 0 0 3 WAN 0 0 4 Active user WAN 0 0 5 Passive user WAN 0 0 6 WAN 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Network Setting gt QoS gt Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Monitor Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen Select
55. D M RF a aa aa MM M E MC cM E C D I cad dM RdE 9 BIET UD D E E I iaiia tia 11 Put E Users Guide GU i ec ep aa 19 Chapter 1 InHoducHiio ndn OR ER OE DR ERO FRE aa 21 DRE uc TTE TRI 21 1 2 PU IS for ihe DENIQUE uiis EOM cade sac escam idu OE Lom inb kecb cutis dd Scd Leu i idu see ode erus 21 Ternen tAos cod uicieciiddib Rei dieci emi eain sd Mei Mete MM SEE EDS 21 1 2 2 VoIP Pe3tulBig d ecc reed ier o ce ERE RO be a b a aptid aia acu m ab iaa abore 22 1 2 3 Wireless Connection oo cece ccc cccc cee eececesceeeeeeceeseseaueeeeeeseaeeueeeseeaaeeaeeeesseaeaeeeeeeenens 22 1 3 The WLAN BUOM sempiice e E Cb cea ie tr Loco Ma ERO LO USER LOC a UN ep Se Lasse 23 T2 Ways ID Manage Ine Deve Losses dmi brut a aepo acp aa dc E ee 24 1 5 Good Habits for Managing the Device iimsuidset etiaai te cusi nein peto d tae rr En th quang ea sepu vi dens 24 Ec ce roe 24 d 3 Th RESET Buto orriari biases Site tends etu co aub Enc SDR onc Usu Lot OSEE ER 26 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator eeeeeeeeeeeeee esses esee enn eene nennen nnnm nennen nnn nnn 27 CD AT Ny Qoa LAIL EID Lu I e UI MIEL EE 27 2 1 1 Accessing tho Web Gong el DE i erba i ri le ai e bead D eie EOM Dad tu ed 27 22 mewsotongaau AOU a rr but acum iS tee suki Se CAR Rap ti cuu Eas rau EL a usato f 29 VS NI II MR 29 22 ny VVIWGENE a soto steers toD d E Ead adest iut reor oppure eov dd hend bt c b D wb ri Epp a orden 29 crt cepwcnsIBI u M RI o D D o US T 30 Chapter
56. DNS Server Figure 26 6to4 Tunneling Bto4 Tunneling 6RD Enable Bto4 Tunneling Relay Server IP o 192 88 22 33 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 11 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE ADSL LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select ADSL as the interface that you want to configure The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account WAN Service Type This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select I PoE as the method of encapsulation used by your ISP IP over Ethernet n this type of Internet connection IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 11 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE ADSL continued Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 IPv4 Select Enable to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time If DualStack this function is disabled the Device only runs IPv4 ATM PVC VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit This se
57. DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 Address This section is not available when you select Disable in the I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack field Obtain Pv6 Address Automatically Select this option if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Enable Prefix Delegation Select this to enable Prefix Delegation This enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoA ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Static I Pv6 Address Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Prefix length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the I Pv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon hexadecimal notation 6to4 Tunneling Select 6to4 if the Device is connected to a network that has both IPv6 and IPv4 and the IPv4 addresses are public IP addresses In this mode the Device can convert an IPv4 address directly to an IPv6 address The format is 2002 IPv4 address in hexadecimal 48 If you select this option th
58. DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling Mozilla Firefox HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections Java Sun C v Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart Microsoft vv O Java console enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing F b Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java JavaScript and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 198 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options Stree Help Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctrl J Add ons Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Ckrl Shift A Page Info FireFTP Clear Private Data Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options Session Manager a L Options ne P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 199 Mozilla Firefox Content Security B di S Feeds Privacy Security Advanced L amp M i Main Tabs wv Block pop u
59. IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements This Product includes wide dhcpv6 under the following license KAME COPYRIGHT v 1 2 2004 07 29 19 02 18 jinmei Exp Copyright C 1998 2004 WIDE Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCI DENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS O
60. No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics Status This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the WAN interface on the Device Pass Rate bps This shows how much traffic bps forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully Queue Monitor This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the queue Pass Rate bps This shows how much traffic bps assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully Drop Rate bps This shows how much traffic bps assigned to this queue are dropped P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 9 6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 9 6 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 45 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Tra
61. Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast address format is as follows Table 110 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in
62. Others m 8024P 0 BE as Ts Exclude IV IP Protocol Userdefined 5 rH Exclude I PPacettengh 46 1504 m Exclude DSCP F m Exclude TCP ACK fa Exclude DHCP VendorClassiD DHCP Option 60 m Exclude Class ID String F Serice rt m m Exclude LE Class Name Give a class name to this traffic such as Email in this example To Queue Link this to a queue created in the QoS Queue Setup screen which is the Email queue created in this example From Interface This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from Select Lan Ether Type Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer AA FF AA FF AA FF Type the MAC Mask if you know it IP Address Type the IP address of your computer 192 168 1 23 Type the IP Subnet Mask if you know it I P Protocol Select User defined and enter 25 as the IP Protocol This maps e mail traffic to queue 7 created in the previous screen see the IP Protocol field This also maps your computer s IP address and MAC address to queue 7 see the Source fields P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 75 Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Setting QoS Monitor This shows the bandwidth allotted to e mail traffic compared to other network traffic Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh Status Interface Monitor 1 ptm0 3
63. Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface 250 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Traffic Status 18 6 The VoIP Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Vol P Status to open the following screen You can view the VoIP traffic statistics in this screen Figure 120 System Monitor gt VoIP Status Refresh interval 5 seconds gt SIP Status SIP 1 Disabled 0 00 00 ChangeMe ChangeMe NO N A N A SIP 2 Disabled 0 00 00 ChangeMe gChangeMe NO N A NIA Call Status 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s SIP 1 0 Second s Idle None 0 Day s 0 Hour s 0 Minute s sa 0 Second s Idle None Phone Status Phone 1 ChangeMe ChangeMe ONHOOK Phone 2 ChangeMe ChangeMe ONHOOK The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 79 System Monitor gt VoIP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box
64. Phone gt Phone Device LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Phone ID This is the phone device number Outgoing SIP This is the outgoing SIP number of the phone device Number Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account 16 6 1 Edit Phone Device You can decide which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Device use by clicking the Edit icon next to a Phone ID The following screen displays You cannot edit the account if it is not activated Go to VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account gt Edit to activate a SIP account see Section 16 3 on page 224 for more information Figure 105 Phone Device Edit SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP 1 ChangeMe ChangeMe SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call Iv SiP 1 ChangeMe ChangeMe FXO Interface to Receive Incoming Call M Enable tony e The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Phone Device Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port SIP Number This shows the SIP account number SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call SIP Account Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected SIP account on this phone port If you select more than one SIP account for i
65. RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 71 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 0 Emergency The system is unusable 1 Alert Action must be taken immediately 2 Critical The system condition is critical P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Logs Table 71 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY 3 Error There is an error condition on the system 4 Warning There is a warning condition on the system 5 Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system 6 Informational The syslog contains an informational message 7 Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 17 2 The System Log Screen Click System Monitor gt Log to open the System Log screen Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in the upper left drop down list box Figure 113 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log Remote Management x Level All Refresh Clear Logs 1 1970 Jan 13 notice Send DHCP ACK to 00 24 21 7E 20 96 with IP 08 35 32 192 168 1970 Jan 13 i 94 294 7E 2 08 35 32 notice Receive DHCP REQUEST from 00
66. Select Enable to have your Device assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to LAN computers and other devices that are DHCP clients If you select Disable you need to manually configure the IP addresses of the computers and other devices on your LAN When DHCP is used the following fields need to be set IP Addressing Values IP Pool Starting This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Address Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DNS Values DNS Server 1 3 Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the Device s WAN IP address Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers You must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previousl
67. Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows Figure 163 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties a Ini x Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple System Preferences Figure 164 Mac OS X 10 4 Apple Menu K 4 Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide sit Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 In the System Preferences window click the Network icon Figure 165 Mac OS X 10 4 Sy
68. Sharing You can share this printer with other network users If you want to share this printer you must provide a share name You can use the suggested name or type a new one The share name will be visible to other network users O Share name 19 Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to print a test page A pop up screen displays to ask if the test page printed correctly Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Print Test Page To confirm that the printer is installed properly you can print a test page Do you want to print a test page OXes O No P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 20 The following screen shows your current printer settings Select Finish to complete 3 adding a new printer Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer E Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer Wizard You specified the following printer settings Name Share name Port Model Default Test page HP DeskJet 1220C Not Shared IP 192 168 1 1 HP DeskJet 1220C Yes Yes To close this wizard click Finish Back Finish Cancel Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer Click the Print Center icon located in the Macintosh Dock a place holding a series of icons shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop Proceed t
69. Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 59 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Add Remove Programs Pro perties gix Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add or remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components M AlAddress Book amp Communications C RY Desktop Themes 0 0 MB M ii Games 10 1 MB C Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel Apply P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 In the Communications window select th Components selection box e Universal Plug and Play check box in the Figure 60 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components Communications To install a component select the check box next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s
70. THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSI ON OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTI ON THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATI ONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATI ON OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRI ES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCI DENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITA
71. Table 70 European Flash Key Commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call Switch back to the call if there is no second call Flash 0 Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer Flash 1 Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold Flash 2 1 Switch back and forth between two calls 2 Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call 3 Separate the current three way conference call into two individual calls one is on line the other is on hold Flash 3 Create three way conference connection Flash 983t Transfer the call to another phone 240 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming ca
72. The Tiara PEL vic nee T 197 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 12 xl TUI RE 199 PE USUS 8 tata ta i tet ia ida nausea tenes uM LM SEE IDEM eM cas Pa ana 199 121 1 Whal You Can Do in thie NG eT 199 12 02 Wha Ven Need IO KION naransan a AEAU dodd 199 T22 Ihe General Soen 49 i doo a a eee 200 ded Dg STINE B CIBO dccem n id ee c ta bird pen isa e ed lin 201 12 4 Firewall Technical Fiefer eliGg 11er erkennen aun uan aacE Roue ra iaa R2 E kno ria 202 12 4 1 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall ssssessss 202 194 2 oenn GODSIDOISHDIBS acondicionado clc ac a coa pd cd 202 Chapter 13 BO FIIBE nouam E M PE MM UE MM CM EM 205 DONNER VI SEU ERR 205 131 1 What You Need TO KNOW uisus ecc atrae ER NO ee PEE ORE c Ren a e aes 205 139 2 The MAG Filter SOEN Laici se rk kr etn ace andata c bn Fed Sr Rated e D EUR a UR D ORE 205 Chapter 14 pit Resp Me E 207 DRESS CI NUR Lm INN P TR RE 207 14 2 The Parental Control SOTO 21 ced raa tont em bns d UR b nick d be qd ax 207 14 2 1 Add Edit a Parental Control Rule era tasa tetto tate FER ctn dann oA eUIU da RE pET ES SNR RRERNdA 208 Chapter 15 Cerificdigs sod p debui DEED AE LLL MEE LC EI 211 DO pases epee teat bxc bate esto e eR pha ies a a dana 211 T5 1 1 What vou Gan De inthis Ghapiat lt ioscesssnscaregitiasaiwcasi acpindactrannieaieiacniosese aixandnabinies 211 15 12 War WORN ee IO YE ceeiiassac eisccc acabas t
73. This is the service you may use to access the Device LAN WLAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the LAN and WLAN WAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the Device from the WAN Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide System 21 1 Overview You can configure system settings including the host name domain name and the inactivity time out interval in the System screen 21 1 1 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Domain Name This is a network address that identifies the owner of a network connection For example in the network address www zyxel com support files the domain name is www zyxel com 21 2 The System Screen Use the System screen to configure the system s host name domain name and inactivity time out interval The Host Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name Find the system name of your Windows computer In Windows XP click start My Computer View system inform
74. Use this screen to maintain basic information about each SIP account You can also enable and disable each SIP account configure the volume echo cancellation and VAD Voice Activity Detection settings for each individual phone port on the Device How to Find Out More See Chapter 3 on page 33 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP See Section on page 232 for advanced technical information on SIP 16 1 3 Before You Begin Before you can use these screens you need to have a VoIP account already set up If you don t have one yet you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready before you start to configure the Device 16 2 The SIP Service Provider Screen Use this screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Click VoIP gt SIP to open the SIP Service Provider screen Note Click more to see all the fields in the screen You don t necessarily need to use all these fields to set up your account Click hide more to see and configure only the fields needed for this feature P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 221 Chapter 16 VoIP Figure 100 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection Gen
75. WPS Use this screen to use WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup to establish a wireless connection WMM Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM Scheduling Use this screen to configure when the Device enables or disables the wireless LAN 30 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Home LAN Setup Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings and other Networking advanced properties Static DHCP Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses UPnP Use this screen to enable the UPnP function File Sharing Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device Media Server Use this screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Printer Server Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device Static Route Static Route Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device DNS Route DNS Route Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes QoS General Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Class Setup Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified tra
76. Wizard window and This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device Turn on your computer and the Device Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 64 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q pack eJ 2 Pp Search Folders ii Address e Network Connections EE Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection amp Create a new connection Internet Connection Disable LANorH Status a Create Shortcut Cm Rename Properes Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Li Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 167 Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Figure 65 Internet Connection Properties Y Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Internet Connection This connecti
77. YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED HOWEVER CERTAIN ZYXEL S PRODUCTS MAY CONTAIN IN PART SOME THIRD PARTY S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY RUN DISTRIBUTE MODIFY AND IMPROVE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY S LICENSES OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS THE OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW ZYXEL MAY HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND OR SOFTWARE OR MADE AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY MODIFY AND REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make o
78. Yes ZW The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 6 Network Setting gt Broadband LABEL DESCRIPTION Switch WAN Mode Type If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router such as ADSL available you can select EtherWAN from the drop down list box and click Switch WAN Interface The Device will use Ethernet WAN as the WAN mode Add new WAN Click this to create a new WAN interface Interface This is the index number of the connection Name This is the service name of the connection Type This shows the type of interface used by this connection Mode This shows whether the connection is in routing mode or bridge mode Encapsulation This shows the method of encapsulation used by this connection IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is enabled VPI This is the Virtual Path Identifier VPI VCI This is the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI Vlan8021p This indicates the 802 1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned VlanMuxl d This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned ATM QoS This shows the ATM Quality of Service QoS type configured for this connection This displays N A when there is no ATM QoS assigned IGMP Proxy This shows whet
79. a longer beacon interval when transmitting traffic that does not require a short Save Deliver packet exchange interval APSD Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 6 Scheduling Screen Click Network Setting Wireless Scheduling to open the Wireless LAN Scheduling screen Use this screen to configure when the Device enables or disables the wireless LAN Figure 41 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling Wireless LAN Scheduling C Enable Disable o a D off o 3 D off o 3 O off off o 3 gt Off o 3 Off o s gt Off 505 5n05n5n05n5o05E e 2 o 3 O off I Everyday 00 v hour oo min oo hour 00 min Mon oo hour oo min oo hour oo min Tue oo hour oo min oo hour oo min Wed oo F hour oo min oo hour oo min Thu oo hour oo min oo hour oo min I Fri oo hour oo min oo hour oo min Sat 00 v hour oo min oo hour 00 min I Sun 00 hour 00 v min 00 nour 00 min B note Specify the same begin time and end time means the whole day schedule Apply Cancel The following table describes
80. and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LI BRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI CABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LI BRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTI ON 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLI CABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRI GHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LI BRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTI AL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LI BRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LI BRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements This Product includes Flex under the following License Flex carries the copyright
81. background material relevant to the Vol P screens P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 233 Chapter 16 VoIP 16 10 1 16 10 2 VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit switched telephone network You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP companies provide VoIP service Circuit switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second Kbps in each direction to handle a telephone call Vol P can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth SIP The Session Initiation Protocol SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit switched telephone networks SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity sometimes referred to as a SIP address A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI Uniform Resource Identifier A SIP account s URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the
82. before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the Device uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communi
83. button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 133 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful 6 7 6 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router T
84. cursor into a hand with which you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross references to related text Click them to jump to the corresponding section of the User s Guide PDF Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com suronranowoxns a PARTNER sa Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base
85. devices The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2 It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices Click Network Settings gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Figure 36 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 Security Level More Secure Recommended l l eee v v v om Security Mode WPA2 E Authentication Server IP Address Port Number 1812 Shared Secret hide more WPA Compatible C Enable Disable Group Key Update Timer 0 sec Encryption A m 130 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional
86. emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNI X environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host Systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix E Common Services P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide IPv6 Overview Pv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a25b 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 Pv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a25 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1la2f 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1la2f 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15
87. entry displays in the Available Network List that means there is no wireless network available within range Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer 3 When you try to connect to an AP with security configured a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Use the Next button to move on to the next screen You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen Encryption Type nae Pre Shared Key fi 2MyVVPAPSKpresharedkey34 Back _Next Exit 4 The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue Network Name SSID SSID Example3 Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11b g Channel Auto Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 39 Chapter 3 Tutorials The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link I nfo screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link I nfo screen displays details of the active connection Check the network information in the Link I nfo screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network If the wireless client is not connected to a ne
88. example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended 390 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyri
89. following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project foruse in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRI BUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCI DENTAL SPECI
90. give priority to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 1000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 1 Mbps Setting this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed will stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth If you set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed the Device will not use some of the interface s available bandwidth Leave this field blank to have the Device set this value automatically Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by These fields are ignored if upstream traffic matches a class you configured in the Class Setup screen If you select Ethernet Priority IP Precedence or Packet Length and traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen the Device assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length See Section 9 6 1 o
91. included in a component click Details Components a NetMeeting amp Phone Dialer Universal Plug and Play Ga Virtual Private Networking lt 0 4 MB 0 0 MB 42 4 MB 0 0 MB 866 3 MB Space used by installed components Space required Space available on disk x Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Sees Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections Networking Components Figure 61 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q pack eJ d px Address Network Connections Network Tasks Operator Assisted Dialing Dial up Preferences Network Identification Bridge Connections Advanced Settings j Optional Networking Components In the Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 TheWindows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking 5 Service in the Components selection box and click Details
92. information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words For example if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 6 7 2 1 SSID Normally the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 6 7 2 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use the wir
93. is described in the following table Table 33 File Sharing Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Volume Select the volume in the USB storage device that you want to add as a share in the Device This field is read only when you are editing the share Share Path Manually enter the file path for the share or click the Browse button and select the folder that you want to add as a share This field is read only when you are editing the share Description You can either enter a short description of the share or leave this field blank Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 157 Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 6 The Media Server Screen The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video music and photos from the USB storage device connected to your Device without having to copy them to another computer The Device can function as a DLNA compliant media server The Device streams files to DLNA compliant media clients like Windows Media Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a group of personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network The Device media server enables you to Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the Device Use hardware based media clients like the DMA 2500 to play the f
94. its factory defaults 6 7 6 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 45 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR D gt EE 72 IAD SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 46 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION ee G e CLIENT 1 es AP1 se o e y ENROLLEE x A CLIENT 2 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the W
95. l l l l o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l ls o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l FFOF Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FCOO 0000 0000 0000 Interface ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID EUI 64 The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following example MAC 00 13 49 12 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 EE E 34 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in
96. next to the connection you want to configure Select VDSL or EtherWAN as the interface type Routing as the encapsulation mode and IP over Ethernet as the WAN service type Figure 19 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE VDSL EtherWAN General Name Type Mode WANServiceType IPv6 IPv4 DualStack VLAN Enable VLAN Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID 1 4094 IP Address C Obtain an IP Address Automatically Enable DHCP Option 60 Static IP Address IP Address SubnetMask GatewaylPAddress m vost vj Routing IP over Ethernet g Enable v r 3900 3905 are reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server Obtain DNS info Automatically Use the following Static DNS IP Address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server IPv6 Address C Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically Enable Prefix Delegation Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address Prefix length IPv6 Default Gateway C 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically m Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Primary IPv6 DNS Server Secondary IPv6 DNS Server EXE Figure 20 6to4 Tunneling 9 Bto4 Tunneling 6RD Enable Bto4 Tunneling Relay Server IP o 192 88 22 33 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 8 Broadband Add Edit Rou
97. not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Default Gateway Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway DNS Server The section is not available when you select Bridge in the WAN Service Type field Obtain DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure Static DNS IP manually Address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server Secondary DNS Server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 Address This section is not available when you select Disable in the I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack field P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE ADSL continued Automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain I Pv6 Select this option if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the Address connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Enable Prefix Delegation Select this to enable Pre
98. of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when the DSL Link Type is set to EoA VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Constant Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec This field is available
99. of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another 2 Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 133 3 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which 4 Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identificati
100. on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this Licen
101. or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Table 43 Class Setup Add Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Others 802 1p This field is a
102. ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 58 LAN and WAN IP Addresses DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Device as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Device provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The Device is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking LAN TCP IP The Device has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If
103. public SNMP Device Indes fi P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 Click Finish to close the wizard window Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Completing the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You have selected a port with the following characteristics SNMP No Protocol Raw Rawl Device 182 168 1 1 Port Name IP 192 168 1 1 Adapter Type To complete this wizard click Finish Cancel 12 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list of printers 13 Select the printer model from the list of Printers 14 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers you can insert the printer driver installation CD disk or download the driver file to your computer click Have Disk and install the new printer driver 15 Click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Install Printer Software The manufacturer and model determine which printer software to use t Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation I disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for compatible printer software Manufacturer Printers Fujitsu S HP DeskJet 1200C PS GCE HP DeskJet 1220C Generic Gestetner Sf HP DeskJet 1600C HP SF HP DeskJet 16000M PS mm xb seasan gf This driver is digitally signed Windows Updat
104. range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you DSL Link Type The DSL link type is set to EoA Ethernet over ATM to have an Ethernet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services EoA supports IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are e LLC SNAP BRI DGI NG n LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when the DSL Link Type is set to EoA e VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Constant Bit Rate to specify fixed always on b
105. server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 22 Time Setting Table 83 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you wo
106. sor ea bbc d cud bana aa 76 3 12 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org seen 77 2 12 2 Canning DDNS en Your Dewuiep nat eres n c Rasa cpi bend ape ag e uet 77 Pelee Tesino ihe DDNS SENG e 77 Part Il Technical Heferentep i eene eth taco naeh p ba Me Pe p ERA Ru KRERPR ER UE 79 Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info cesse eese eeeeeee nennen ennt natn 81 AT NOVI m 81 42 nhe GBnmectiapistdti SEMI sirnik kinanda dena d eere caen RR AIDE adamantane 81 da has nid SOPOBE s odas ber va DEP ede pre tur RR precisi a boc ER HUE TIPP E PH an beded tea NE na 83 Chapter 5 BroadDand Oce suei 87 REID NT NE LAO D D 87 51 1 What You Can Do inthis OCROpUBE uu aeate saam coureur Rubr ronnie a A DL a cuis 88 Bale What You Need to KNOW m 88 5 1 9 Beto YOU BOUE eaa in X Rr cU DE anes 91 5 2 The Broadband SEIS ee ener re me tere ee ee mere reer e reer Peer dedi rtr Vladao see uU rer ek rer err dd eercrrr err 91 5 2 1 Add Edit Intemet Connec I t 93 H3 The 3G BSc QOIS oniiir aa a o RU E E 115 st anie Ae e e E AE E E 117 12 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 6 l lj H9 123 ELTERN paint A E bela uH dba nu n SEE vb n Duc E dad pedo bU Bud 123 G k You Can Doin Me Chaplet e ccdicscineda sacenteee
107. support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying 7 Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the w
108. that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping and the ping statistics will show in the diagnostic TraceRoute Click this button to perform the traceroute function This determines the path a packet takes to the specified host P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 269 Chapter 26 Diagnostic 26 3 The DSL Line Screen Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line to open the screen shown next Figure 135 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line E ATM Status ATM Loopback Test DSL Line Status Reset ADSL Line The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 88 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line ITEM DESCRIPTION ATM Status This is available only when your WAN mode is ADSL Click this button to view your DSL connection s Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM statistics ATM is a networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed The Segmentation and Reassembly SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have bee
109. the Device use Section 16 6 on page 229 Use the Region screen to change settings that depend on the country you are in Section 16 7 on page 231 Use the Call Rule screen to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers Section 16 8 on page 231 Use the FXO screen to set up the PSTN line used to make regular phone calls which do not use the Internet Section 16 9 on page 233 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account In fact if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen it is usually best to leave it at its default setting 16 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP IP is the Internet Protocol which is the message carrying standard the Internet runs on So Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals speech over the Internet or another network that uses the Internet Protocol SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device like a computer or the Device send messages to another In VoIP these messages are about phone calls over the network For example when you dial a number on your Device it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device the number you dialed to take part in the call S
110. the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the Device The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your Device but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for examp
111. the Profile tab to open the screen shown next Click Add to configure a new profile Profile Info J Profile Name Network Type Infrastructure 8 DEFAULT Network Mode 802 11b g Channel Auto Security DISABLE Connect Add Delete Edit P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 The Add New Profile screen appears The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks and displays them in the Scan I nfo box Click Scan if you want to search again You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list Add Scan Info Profile Name PN Examples SSID 5stb Examples T CPE_5257_00 jes cPE_5548_AP Network Type fle ssi Examples Infrastructure Connect to an Access point ald_zyxel C Ad Hoc Connect directly to other computers T ZyXEL xl Scan Select Next Exit 3 Give the profile a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters Select I nfrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP s SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect In this example WPA PSK Encryption Type WPA PSK Back Next Exit 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Encryption Type nae
112. the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled Mode Select This makes sure that only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the Device Select 802 11b g n to allow IEEE802 11b IEEE802 11g and IEEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced Select 802 11b g to allow both IEEE802 11b and IEEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device The transmission rate of your Device might be reduced Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device Select 802 11n only in 2 4G band to allow only IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices with the same frequency range 2 4 GHz to associate with the Device Channel Set the channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel or use Auto to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use If you are having problems with wireless interference changing the channel may help Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays in the Operating Channel field Scan Click this button to have the Device immediately scan for and select a channel which is not used by another device whenever the device rebo
113. the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered INTERNET Green On The Device has an IP connection but no traffic Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used Blinking The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic Off The Device does not have an IP connection Red On The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed WAN Green On This light applies when the Device is in Ethernet WAN mode The Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the Ethernet WAN Off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN DSL Green On The VDSL line is up Blinking The Device is initializing the VDSL line Orange On The ADSL line is up Blinking The Device is initializing the ADSL line Off The DSL line is down ETHERNET1 Green On The Device has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection 4 Giga with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Ethernet Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 1000 Mbps Orange On The Device has a successful 10 10
114. the upload process Reset Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress After the Device configuration has been restored successfully the login screen appears Login again to restart the Device The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 131 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged x 10 44 If you restore the default configuration you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix B on page 299 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful an error screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 25 Backup Restore Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the Device to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 132 Reset Warning Message Warning x D Are you sure you want to reset to factory default EXE Figure 133 Reset n Process Message Yea Router is restarting now Please wait You can also press the RES
115. the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above PPPoE Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here Authentication Mode The Device supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your Device accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your Device accepts CHAP only e PAP Your Device accepts PAP only e MS CHAP Your Device accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP Use Static IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address Address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Routing Feature NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is
116. this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their p
117. to configure Select ADSL as the interface type Routing as the encapsulation mode and PPPoE as the WAN service type Figure 24 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE ADSL General Name Type Mode WANServiceType PPPoE Passthrough IPv6 IPv4 DualStack ATM PVC Configuration VPI 0 255 VCI 32 65535 DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode Service Category Peak Cell Rate cells s Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Maximum Burst Size cells PPP Infomation PPPUserName PPPPassword PPPoESericeName Authentication Method Use Static IP Address IP Address Routing Feature air NAT Enable rH Routing IGMP Proxy Enable r PPP over EthernettPPPoE e Apply as Default Gateway n r Enable gl DNS Server Obtain DNS info Automatically k Use the following Static DNS IP Address BO Primary DNS Server C7 EA Ej Secondary DNS Server 1 LLCiSNaP BRIDGING F Non Realtime VBR s IPv6 Address L C Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically CO Enable Prefix Delegation m o Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address E Ell Prefix length Bp IPv6 Default Gateway 6to4 Tunneling a IPv6 DNS Server E Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically ld Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address poss Primary IPv6 DNS Server Secondary IPv6 DNS Server sony tal Figure 22 6to4 Tunneling 9 Bto4 Tunneling 6RD Enable Bto4 Tunneling Relay Server IP Oo 192 88 22 33 The following
118. to exchange information P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 31 Example of a Wireless Network 1 1 LI I 1 LI r i The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP to interact with the other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your Device is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentifier f two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must sel
119. to the Device or the connected device is not working Registration Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Table4 System Info Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server Click Unregister to delete the SIP account s registration in the SIP server This does not cancel your SIP account but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name The second field displays Registered If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server Click Register to have the Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server The second field displays the reason the account is not registered Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in VoIP gt SIP SIP Settings Register Fail The last time the Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the Device or when you activate it Account Status This shows Active when the SIP account has been registered and ready for use or In Active when the SIP account is not yet
120. used for BSD software slightly modified because it originated at the Lawrence Berkeley not Livermore Laboratory which operates under a contract with the Department of Energy Copyright c 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 The Flex Project Copyright c 1990 1997 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Vern Paxson The United States Government has rights in this work pursuant to contract no DE ACO3 76SF00098 between the United States Department of Energy and the University of California Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM
121. with smaller weights Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in Kbps allowed for traffic on this queue Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 9 4 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EB Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS Click Network Setting QoS Class Setup to open the following screen Figure 79 Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup Add new Classifier 1 u From device Interface Local UnChange UnChange UnChange Fast 4 5 Ether Type IP an 2 ICMP Protocol ICMP UnChange UnChange UnChange Fast 4W Ether Type IP sr 3 HTTP Protocol TCP UnChange UnChange UnChange Active user 3 WM Destination Port 80 Ether Type IP 4 HTTP Proxy Protocol
122. with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the 380 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to c
123. with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 171 Chapter 7 Home Networking 5 Right click on the icon for your Device and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays Figure 71 Network Connections My Network Places z My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Q 27 99 Search Folders Tt Address My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks Add a network place EL Prestige 650R 31 Internet e View network connections Sharing Gateway set up a home or small Create Shortcut office network d gf View workgroup computers TR Rename Properties Other Places 6 Right click on the icon for your Device and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the Device Figure 72 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway ed General m ZEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Description ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 Close Cancel 172 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Routing 8 1 Overview The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the Device send data to devices not re
124. 0 1 M i Status Share Name Share Path Share Description od z Apoly Cancel USB_Storage 3 6 1 2 Set up File Sharing on Your Device You also need to set up file sharing on your Device in order to share files 1 Click Add new share in the File Sharing screen to configure a new share Select your USB device from the Volume drop down list box 2 Click Browse to browse through all the files on your USB device Select the folder that you want to add as a share In this example select Bob s Share Click Apply e GENERIC USB Mass Storage 100 1 Select Type Name i Cc d Mac Cc is zywall 1050 dir c rm Win 7 ix NWD 2205 PowerPC MacOS10 4 Driver 1003 UI 1 7 9 c RECYCLER 2010 08 25 Ol mS Bob s Share 09 45 26 Date N A 2010 08 17 09 38 36 2003 01 01 06 08 00 2010 04 27 14 51 36 2010 08 17 15 15 16 2010 08 22 Apply Back P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 You can add a description for the share or leave it blank The Add Share Directory screen should look like the following Click Apply to finish Volume GENERIC USB Mass Storage 100 1 i Share Path Bob s Share Browse Description EE 4 This sets up the file sharing server You can see the USB storage device listed in the table below Share Directory List Add new share Status Share Name Share Path Share Description Modify Vv Ss GENERIC_USB_
125. 0 Mbps Ethernet Fast connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Ethernet Blinking The Device is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 10 100 Mbps off The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN POWER Green On The Device is receiving power and ready for use Blinking The Device is self testing Red On The Device detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction Off The Device is not receiving power P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION WLAN WPS Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in IEEE 802 11 b g or n mode Blinking The Device is communicating with other wireless clients Orange On The WPS is configured Blinking The Device is setting up a WPS connection Off The wireless network is not activated Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections 1 7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the passwords will be reset to the defaults 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RE
126. 000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size Notation The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 96 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MS ME NUMBER OF 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in t
127. 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Example The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 141 Subnetting Example After Subnetting r gt ll Il jl e D 3 2 e il lt NJ LE 192 168 1 0 25 4 x192 168 1 128 251 f Ls In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The
128. 11 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address Address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Automatically Internet Select this if you have a dynamic IP address Enable DHCP Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the Device in DHCP Option 60 requests that the Device sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address Vendor Class Enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 such as the type of the hardware Identifier or firmware Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP Routing Feature NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Default Gate
129. 13 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA 3 192 168 1 13 IGA 4 192 168 112 X ip Inside Local Inside UM Address ILA Address IGA Teetene tM 192 168 1 10 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Dynamic DNS 11 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure your Device to use Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in applications such as NetMeeting and CU SeeMe You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 11 1 1 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dynd
130. 2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 207 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES o Gi WPS HANDSHAKE 2 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL QD SECURITY INFO p j COMMUNICATION The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmi
131. 202 156 30 41 The converted hexadecimal IP string is ca 9c 1E 29 The IPv6 address prefix becomes 2002 ca9c 1e29 48 Figure 15 Pv6 6to4 Mode Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The Device uses the received IPv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to LAN hosts The hosts use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses 5 1 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 5 2 The Broadband Screen The Device must have a WAN interface to allow users to use the Ethernet WAN port or DSL port to access the Internet Use the Broadband screen to view or modify a WAN interface P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Click Network Setting Broadband The following screen opens Figure 16 Network Setting gt Broadband Switch WAN Mode Type VDSL M t f Add new WAN Interface Internet Setup 1 EtherWAN1 EtherWAN Routing IPoE Disable N A NIA NIA 2 AdsIWAN1 ADSL Routing IPoE Disable 8 35 N A 3 VdsIWAN1 VDSL Routing IPoE Disable NIA NIA NIA N A NIA Enabled Enabled Yes 2 N A UBR Enabled Enabled Yes 4 NIA NIA Enabled Enabled
132. 24 21 7E 2 3 1970 Jan 13 notice Send DHCP ACK to 00 24 21 7E 20 96 with IP 08 35 27 192 168 1970 Jan 13 Y E 08 35 27 notice Receive DHCP REQUEST from 00 24 21 7E 2 5 1970 Jan 13 notice 3end DHCP OFFER to 00 24 21 7E 20 96 with IP 08 35 27 192 168 1970 Jan 13 Vi 94 24 7E 6 08 35 27 notice Receive DHCP DISCOVER from 00 24 21 7E 2 1970 Jan 13 ACK Jr 7 08 35 22 notice Send DHCP NACK to 00 24 21 7E 2 1970 Jan 13 T 8 08 35 22 notice Receive DHCP REQUEST from 00 24 21 7E 2 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 72 System Monitor gt Log gt System Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Level Select a severity level from the drop down list box This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected When you select a severity the Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Clear Log Click this to delete all the logs This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Messages This field states the reason for the log P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Logs 17 3 The Phone Log Screen Click System Monitor gt Log to open the Phone Log screen Use this screen to view phon
133. 2HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to t
134. 3 c lntemict i p 2 m Ss 192 168 1 33 o u mmmmm Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 143 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example Jum um um um um um um mom LAN WAN M ME BRL D NU 192 168 1 1 lt Internet p 1 a Nu P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 297 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 144 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example gem mE NE EN NE NN GS OUS GN a a 192 168 1 1 LAN WAN T n 192 168 1 1 Internet Se um um um um us mm Rem e eee ee a P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address N
135. 33 Size 32 Static DHCP Addresses 128 Max Static Routes 16 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the Device Wireless Functionality wireless devices only Allow IEEE 802 11n IEEE 802 11b and or IEEE 802 11g wireless clients to connect to the Device wirelessly Enable wireless security WEP WPA 2 WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator an HTTP FTP SCP SFTP tool to put it on the Device Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Device s configuration You can put it back on the Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert your public IP address es to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the Device assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Dom
136. 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the Device with the connection cables Figure 136 Wall mounting 1 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 287 Chapter 28 Product Specifications 5 Mount the Device on the wall mounting bracket which is already installed on the wall Make sure that the Device is firmly attached to the bracket so it does not fall off Figure 137 Wall mounting 2 d VOR A The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 138 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 30 0 2 0 30 0 2 0 288 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device such as computers servers routers and printers needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarl
137. 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 104 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 104 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the
138. 900 Queue Monitor WAN Default Queue WAN 1 0 0 2 LAN_Default_Queue LAN 0 0 3 Fast WAN 0 0 4 Active user WAN 0 0 5 Passive user WAN 0 0 6 Slow WAN 0 0 7 Email WAN 2992 0 3 12 Access the Device Using DDNS If you connect your Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet The Device s WAN IP address changes dynamically Dynamic DNS DDNS allows you to access the Device using a domain name http zyxelrouter dyndns org a b c d To use this feature you have to apply for DDNS service at www dyndns org This tutorial shows you how to Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org Configuring DDNS on Your Device Testing the DDNS Setting Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use DDNS P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 12 1 Registering a DDNS Account on www dyndns org 1 Open a browser and type http www dyndns org 2 Apply for a user account This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password 3 Log into www dyndns org using your account 4 Add a new DDNS host name This tutorial uses the following settings as an example Hostname zyxelrouter dyndns org Service Type Host with IP address P Address Enter the WAN IP address that your Device is currently using You can find the IP address on the Device s web co
139. AL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTI ON HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay Qcryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright no
140. Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 ThelSP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields 2 If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the Device s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a25 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1a2 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Si
141. Automatically Select this to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary IPv6 Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Secondary IPv6 Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen 5 2 1 6 Bridge Mode Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select Bridge as the encapsulation mode The screen differs according to the interface type you select P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband If you select VDSL or EtherWAN as the interface type the following screen appears Figure 27 Broadban d Add Edit Bridge VDSL EtherWAN General Name Type Mode VLAN Enable VLAN Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID 1 4094 Bridge Group Available LAN WLAN Port s Select LAN WLAN port s you wish to together with this WAN interface EtherWAN Bridge wj r 3900 3905 are reserved Bridged LAN WLAN Port s Apply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 12 Broadband Add Edit Brid
142. Blocking Select Enable to activate service blocking Available Services This is a list of pre defined services destination ports you may prohibit your LAN computers from using Select the port you want to block and click Add to add the port to the Blocked Services field A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre defined Available Services list You must define it using the Type and Port Number fields See Appendix E on page 359 for some examples of services Blocked Services This is a list of services ports that are inaccessible to computers on your LAN when service blocking is effective To remove a service from this list select the service and click Delete Type Select TCP UDP or TCP and UDP based on which one the custom port uses Port Number Enter the range of port numbers that defines the service For example suppose you want to define the Gnutella service Select TCP type and enter a port range of 6345 6349 Add Click this to add the selected service in Available Services to the Blocked Services list Note that the service is blocked immediately after clicking this Delete Select a service in the Blocked Services and click this to remove the service from the list Clear All Click this to remove all the services in the Blocked Services list P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Firewall 12 4 12 4 1 1 12 4 2 Table 52 Security g
143. CoS 198 251 country code 314 CTS Clear to Send 376 CTS threshold 138 D data fragment threshold 138 default LAN IP address 29 Denial of Service see DoS device management command interface 25 Telnet 25 DHCP 90 152 164 165 209 DHCP relay 310 DHCP server 310 diagnostic 295 differentiated services 252 Differentiated Services see DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services 251 code points 251 marking rule 199 252 disclaimer 425 DLNA 161 DnD 314 DNS 152 183 DNS server address assignment 117 Do not Disturb see DnD domain name system see DNS Domain Name System See DNS DS Differentiated Services 198 DS field 198 252 DSCP 198 251 DSL line reinitialize 298 DTMF 251 detection and generation 316 Dual Tone MultiFrequency see DTMF dynamic DNS 209 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP dynamic jitter buffer 315 dynamic WEP key exchange 382 DYNDNS wildcard 209 E EAP Authentication 380 echo cancellation 229 315 Encapsulation 113 MER 113 PPP over Ethernet 113 encapsulation 95 RFC 1483 113 encryption 140 383 ESS 374 Europe type call service mode 253 Extended Service Set IDentification 124 133 Extended Service Set see ESS external antenna 316 external RADIUS 317 F F4 F5 OAM 312 File Sharing 159 file sharing 24 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index filters MAC address 139 firewalls 211 configuration 213 security 215 firmware 289 fla
144. DNS IP manually address Primary DNS server Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Secondary DNS Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The Device can work in bridge mode or routing mode When the Device is in routing mode it supports the following methods IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet IPoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells PPP over ATM PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital
145. Device to call when you dial the speed dial number Description Enter a short description to identify the party you call when you dial the speed dial number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Add Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Speed Dial Phone Book section Phone Book Use this section to look at all the speed dial entries and to erase them This field displays the speed dial number you should dial to use this entry Number This field displays the SIP number the Device calls when you dial the speed dial number Description This field displays a short description of the party you call when you dial the speed dial number Modify Use this field to edit or erase the speed dial entry Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed dial entry into the Speed Dial section where you can change it Click Add when you finish editing to change the configurations Click the Delete icon to erase this speed dial entry Clear Click this to erase all the speed dial entries Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 16 9 The FXO Screen L Models Only With PSTN line you can make and receive regular PSTN phone calls Use a prefix number to make a regular call When the device does not have power you can make regular calls without dialing a prefix number
146. ENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTI ON WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimers ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Your use of the Device is subject to the terms and condi
147. ET button on the back panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device Refer to Section 1 7 on page 26 for more information on the RESET button 25 3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off You may need to do this if the Device hangs for example Click Maintenance gt Reboot Click the Reboot button to have the Device reboot This does not affect the Device s configuration P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 267 Chapter 25 Backup Restore P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 26 1 Overview Diagnostic You can use different diagnostic methods to test a connection and see the detailed information These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device 26 2 The Ping TraceRoute Screen Ping and traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot network or Internet connections Click Maintenance Diagnostic to open the Ping TraceRoute screen shown next Figure 134 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping TraceRoute PING 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 33 56 data bytes 192 168 1 33 ping statistics 4 packets transmitted 0 packets received 10096 packet loss Hu SY Ping TraceRoute The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 87 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt Ping TraceRoute LABEL DESCRIPTION Ping Type the IP address of a computer
148. F THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements Copyrigh
149. FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FC00 0000 0000 0000 DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 is a server client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier DUID which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendor assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number registered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device IPv6 6to4 Mode This mode also enables the Device to convert IPv6 packets to IPv4 packets But instead of pre configuring the destination router you need to configure a 6to4 relay router that helps to route the packets to any IPv6 networks In this mode the Device should get a public IPv4 address for the WAN The Device adds an IPv4 header to an IPv6 packet when transmitting the packet to the Internet In reverse the Device removes the IPv4 header from an IPv6 packet when receiving it from the Internet An IPv6 address using the 6to4 mode consists of an IPv4 address the format is as the following 2002 a public IPv4 address in hexadecimal 48 For example P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband A public IPv4 address is
150. Figure 62 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components L Management and Monitoring Tools Networking Services C 35 Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB In the Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 63 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check bos amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services C ABI RIP Listener 0 0 MB A Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB L Universal Plug and Play 0 2 MB Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking click Next 7 10 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component
151. Firewall to open the General screen Figure 89 Security gt Firewall gt General Firewall Enable C Disable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Firewall Select Enable to activate the firewall The Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 200 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Firewall 12 3 The Services Screen Use this screen to enable service blocking and to maintain the list of services you want to block To access this screen click Security gt Firewall gt Services Note These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN Figure 90 Security gt Firewall gt Services LAN to WAN Services Blocking C Enable Disable Available Services Blocked Services FTP TCP 20 21 HTTP TCP 80 PING ICMP 0 TELNET TCP 23 TFTP UDP 69 SSH TCP 22 Select CustomPort you can give new port range for blocking Type TCP h Add Delete Clear All Port Number Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 52 Security gt Firewall gt Services LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN to WAN Services
152. General Public License has P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative wo
153. HE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes Dropbear and ncurses under the MIT License The MIT License Copyright C year copyright holders Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS ORIMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHERLI ABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE This Product includes eventlog libedit libupnp Openssh Ppp
154. HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Firewall The Device can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The Device is installed between the LAN WLAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The Device has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Finding Out More See Section 12 4 on page 202 for advanced technical information on firewall 12 2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the Device s firewall Click Security
155. ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 101 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Dae SEIT IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 102 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 103 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 1 255 255 255 128 25 2 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30
156. IFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows Linux Samba and other operating systems refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility 7 1 2 4 About Printer Server Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices Operating System An operating system OS is the interface which helps you manage a computer Common examples are Microsoft Windows Mac OS or Linux TCP IP TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is a set of communications protocols that most of the Internet runs on Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer such as a process run by your web browser When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 151 Chapter 7 Home Networking Supported OSs Your operating system must support TCP IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW port 9100 protocol The following OSs support Device s printer sharing feature Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 SE Second Edition Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Macintosh OS X 7 2 The LAN Setup Screen Click
157. IP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VolP account It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet When you set the Device to use your SIP account to make calls the Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet Strictly speaking you don t need a SIP account It is possible for one SIP device like the Device to call another without involving a SIP service provider However the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD detects whether or not speech is present This lets the Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD the Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation G 168 is an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk
158. IPv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 111 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local node FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local node FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local connected link FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local connected link FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local site FF05 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 All DHCP severs on a local site P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 112 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00 e e FF01 FF02 FF03 FF04 FF05 FF06 FF07 FF08 FF09 FFOA FFOB FFOC FFOD FFOE ce ce ce e o e ce e e e e e ce ce e o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l s o l l l l l l l l l l l
159. IPv6 addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated Unlike DHCPv6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration the owner and status of addresses don t need to be maintained by a DHCP server Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface It combines the prefix and the interface ID generated from its own Ethernet MAC address see Interface ID and EUI 64 to form a complete Pv6 address When IPv6 is enabled on a device its interface automatically generates a link local address beginning with fe80 When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the Device is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface it generates another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router This is a routable global IP address DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 is a server client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier DUI D which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendo
160. ITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE This basically says do whatever you please with this software except remove this notice or take advantage of the University s or the flex authors name Note that the flex skl scanner skeleton carries no copyright notice You are free to do whatever you please with scanners generated using flex for them you are not even bound by the above copyright This Product includes OpenSSL under the OpenSSL License LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the
161. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure you have enabled the wireless LAN by the WPS WLAN button or the Network Setting Wireless General screen Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again If the problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection Check if you set the WAN Mode type to ADSL VDSL in the Broadband screen to have the Device use the DSL port for Internet access Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN connection with the Internet account information provided by your ISP If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service all LAN ports and WLAN BSSs are bridged to one WAN connection make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the Home Networking screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection 276 Check if you set the WAN Mode type to EtherWAN in the Broadband screen to have the Device use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet access Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your network Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN connection with the Internet account information provided by your IS
162. LAN VLAN 116 252 group 252 ID 252 ID tags 252 Introduction 116 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLANID 116 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 116 voice activity detection 228 315 voice channels 315 voice coding 250 VoIP 245 features 23 peer to peer calls 243 standards compliance 315 tutorial 51 VoIP features 23 W WAN Wide Area Network see WAN 93 warnings 7 warranty 426 note 426 Web Configurator 29 web configurator passwords 30 WEP 127 141 316 WEP Encryption 128 Wi Fi Protected Access see WPA Wired Equivalent Privacy see WEP wireless client configuration 42 profile 45 security 378 tutorial 40 wireless client WPA supplicants 384 wireless LAN 121 authentication 138 140 BSS 141 example 142 channel 123 encryption 140 example 122 fragmentation threshold 138 limitations 141 MAC address filter 139 316 MBSSID 142 preamble 138 RADIUS server 140 RTS CTS threshold 138 scheduling 137 security 138 SSID 139 activation 132 WEP 141 WPA 141 WPA PSK 141 WPS 143 145 example 147 limitations 148 PIN 144 push button 143 wireless network example 121 wireless security 378 WLAN 121 auto scan channel 125 interference 375 passphrase 127 scheduling 137 security parameters 386 see also wireless WEP 127 WLAN button 25 WPA 141 316 382 key caching 384 pre authentication 384 user authentication 384 vs WPA PSK 383 wireless client supplicant 384 with RADIUS applicat
163. M nego M S D E D VE 186 H5 00S Technical Felerel a i ED lani a pad E REDE EE E e S ap 187 G0 IEEE OOCADEELIGM pee 187 96 2 PMP RSC SUING Mem 187 OO NM MANN A as e RO et Cary m v oan ass Soe c e Gaus MA UTI 187 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 1111 11111eeeeeee elle eiieeee eene nena anna nana aaa mnun 189 POLL DP oasotsaaetecdt adieu elitas b nen nr ect peer Men a a te Torre ete 189 10 321 What Nou Carn Do Indis Chee ouio arcpEFE EPI EEE ora Pra i ceo EE Y ee Pl p P pois 189 10 1 2 Whal You Nes TO HON ucteiqekee ied cepa eg e ie d ke pE Dod dietas drag te bue ist A 189 TOZ The Pot Fonarding SCRE tussim issibiu tec terscseitu sesto a 190 10 2 1 The Pon Forming Screen auuiuossdine stbaapcumd inaen aN oue dusk dU cv 190 10 2 2 The Port Forwarding Edit Sree oso esr eM Ehre ean prO RR FM Deu EP DaR AEE 192 TOO The Sessione SOE sacs coemagn acri oet na rr Fi aa Eee ERI Ri ra ta s Lapi ta rts 193 0108 TOS HRS PIOTBEQUNOES esas kam d kd bdo Edda ax Dub ei dass dd baak kon a kd inducer Str rare dandas 193 TT NAT DTN NS TR Iu m teen Weds 193 10 4 2 Vt NAT DOGS bee erp ERE ERE UENIRE PT edi AGAS ena qu a E errand aa RR RETI e 194 10 P105 HN NAT WOKS Gussiinditseppeduticteniideat ori epd de Ro bord a Pes isa beo REO Eo ORE Ge 194 Chapter 11 c 197 MA MRE east m TE OA 197 TL What You Need To BOW skins sea ache SE cx ap Eran uda K E ae FR Sind Yes E Rao 197 1 2
164. Mass_Storage GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 GENERIC_USB_Mass_Storage_100_1 3 i 3 6 2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the Device Note The examples in this User s Guide show you how to use Microsoft s Windows XP to browse your shared files Refer to your operating system s documentation for how to browse your file structure Open Windows Explorer to access Bob s Share using Windows Explorer browser In Windows Explorer s Address bar type a double backslash followed by the IP address of the Device the default IP address of the Device is 192 168 1 1 and press ENTER The share folder Bob s Share is available Address 9 192 168 1 1 Mame Comments Network Tasks x id Bob s Share Bob s Share USB Storage USB Storage gd Add a network place ERU J I 9 Printers and Faxes Shows installed printers and Fax printers and View network connections J Set up a wireless network For a home or small office pet Search Active Directory Show icons For networked UPnP devices Once you access Bob s Share via your Device you do not have to relogin unless you restart your computer 3 7 Using the Media Server Feature Use the media server feature to play files on a computer or on your television using DMA 2500 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EB Chapter 3 Tutorials This section shows
165. N AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AI M New I1CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security IPSEC TUNNEL Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files TCP 21 that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 359 Appendix E Common Services Table 109 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagno
166. NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Finding Out More See Section 10 4 on page 193 for advanced technical information on NAT 10 2 The Port Forwarding Screen Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports The most often
167. NG LUE 234GDSL Excom Tm ny DSL Auto x iv 192 168 132 Primary DNS Server fi 92 168 1 254 Secondary DNS Server fi 92 168 1 253 EE This completes your DSL WAN connection setting 6 You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows Switch WAN Mode Type ADSL z Switch WAN Interface Add new WAN Interface Internet Setup 1 EtherWAN1 EtherWAN Routing IPoE Disable N A NIA NIA N A N A Enabled Enabled Yes i4 TU 2 AdsIWAN1 ADSL Routing IPoE Disable 8 35 N A N A UBR Disabled Enabled No 2 4 VdsIWAN1 VDSL Routing IPoE Disable NIA NIA N A N A N A Enabled Enabled Yes ZW P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Try to connect to a website such as www zyxel com to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens 3 3 How to Set up a Wireless Network This section gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters The wireless clients can access the Internet through the Device wirelessly 3 3 4 Example Parameters SSID SSID Example3 802 11 mode 802 11b g Channel auto Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key 12MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 An access point AP or wireless router is referred to as the AP and a compute
168. Network Setting Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device and configure the DNS server information that the Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Figure 48 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LAN IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 231 1 192 168 246 1 are reserved for VLAN DHCP Server State DHCP Enable C Disable IP Addressing Values IP Pool Starting Address fi92 168 1 33 Pool Size B2 DNS Values DNS Server 1 io246811 DNS Server 2 None a DNS Server 3 None oa The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 28 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN IP Setup IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so DHCP Server State P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 28 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt LAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP
169. Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import the certificate Figure 98 Trusted CA gt Import The certificate is in one ofthe following formats Binary X 508 PEM Base 64 encoded Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 Certificate File Path Choose File No file chosen The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA gt Import LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate File Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to Path find it Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the Device Back Click Back to return to the previous screen 15 5 View Certificate Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate change the certificate s name and set whether or not you want the Device to check a certification authority s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority EJ P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen Click the View icon to open the View Certificate screen Figure 99 Trusted CA View Certificate Name certnew cer BEGIN CERTIFICATE IIEaTCCA1GgAwIBAglQGKaoaDf
170. Ns RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authenti
171. OS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 112 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies VLAN Tagging Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Only stations within the same group can communicate with each other Your Device can add IEEE 802 1Q VLAN ID tags to voice frames that it sends to the network This allows the Device to communicate with a SIP server that is a member of the same VLAN group Some ISPs use the VLAN tag to identify voice traffic and give it priority over other traffic 16 10 4 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold call waiting and call transfer are generally available from your VoIP service provider The Device supports the following services
172. OU rq Ner 149 Poe MELAN SEU SOTA I D E 152 CS The State CAG Ecol poem T 153 Pgs CERIO TOO e E dsc rusen A AE T AE E O N E at dE R CUM ER RE 153 TATIE UPP OCO ee E 155 Ta Ihe Fe shanng sera i aranna ENN NAT 155 Tai Doe TOBE aan Aa 156 Toa POG EIT Fie ANG ETE TEILE 157 1 0 The Medio Puri gera Er 158 A Meus Wer SoOBIll sirnani e n E N D Fee Id dS 159 FAM RECTE ERIT LI II eS 159 FS WI mibi hg Tee NE T T UL I 160 7 9 Installing UPnP in Windows EXAmplg auuicssusesencc teens pc etae aep eene ppc ense pri saai 164 7 10 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example osea p potita pida kon Pci anda YR E Ris ale naa 167 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 8 l 173 Bd ONBIVIB cise un cnn x IRE Se ews ees nx up weil Sa Fans ak EY le Feci n Fa een bis 173 2 Conigunig Siate ROUTE omiiia ean T o 174 zB Add Edt Ae ROUE MN ROREM 175 Chapter 9 Galy of Sorea OO jisi iee ERE ON EE UR UON TEILE M MM DA OM Ea 177 CMS I I ET UT EE NE 177 S L That You Gan Do inthis Chaplains na t btc dant abd 177 9 1 2 What You Need TO KNOW 2505 csirdadines ladederi malessen told adediuteealedeudoes E 177 g2 TS OIS Geral OLEE MEE OE 178 9 3 The CURIE Sep ORB cesonia aaa aoa Etearasatck Pep dx d s a AOE aN Kap 180 9 31 PC QoS A Mee 181 24 The Class Deu DUBBI aceoodesaenisditodas neni ROUX p rob ands 181 gai Ed CO CAES pups nobia FexoD oases cdit um Dude Goma p p a Ub GN Reto ber D Kd 183 SENE c
173. Options PIR Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 193 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked ou can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Add Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Ea Pop up Blocker FAQ Close 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScript If pages of the web configurator do not display prope
174. P P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service all LAN ports and WLAN BSSs are bridged to one WAN connection make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the Home Networking screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time You can only use one type of DSL connection either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time cannot create multiple connections of the same type Your WAN interface must enable VLAN and fill each WAN connection with different VLAN IDs cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the Device but my Internet connection is not available anymore 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 24 2 Turn the Device off and on 3 If the problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 6 on page 24 If the Device is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Turn the Device off and on 3 If the problem continues contact the network admin
175. P 2812HNU L Fx Series 802 11n Wireless VDSL2 VolP Combo WAN IAD ros BOA ROW ae e EE gid m us EK EON S CN E NU sfault Login Details ee ZyXEL SUDBBIBMMO i IP Address http 192 168 1 1 eae en 2 User Name Admin account admin User account user Password Admin account 1234 User account 1234 Firmware Version 3 10 Edition 1 3 2011 www zyxel com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Device using the web configurator Tips for Reading User s Guides On Screen When reading a ZyXEL User s Guide On Screen keep the following in mind f you don t already have the latest version of Adobe Reader you can download it from http www adobe com Use the PDF s bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you Adobe Reader s bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL User s Guide PDFs If you know the page number or know vaguely which page range you want to view you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader then press ENTER to jump directly to that page Type CTRL F to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or phrase This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require You can also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader To quickly move around within a page press the SPACE bar This turns your
176. P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 lf you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen select the profile you are using and click Edit Check the details you entered previously Also refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary 3 4 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding In this tutorial you manage the Doom server on a computer behind the Device In order for players on the Internet like A in the figure below to communicate with the Doom server you need to configure the port settings and IP address on the Device Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192 168 1 34 D 192 168 1 34 LAN WAN mi port 666 You may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer see Chapter 10 on page 190 for more information 1 Click Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Click Add new rule P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Enter the following values Service Name Select User Defined WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded This is the default interface for this example which is MyDSLConnection Start End Ports 666 Translation Start End 666 Ports Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the Doom server This is 192 168 1 34 for th
177. PS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 47 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 ENROLLEE 6 7 6 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and jo
178. PTION T38 Fax Relay Select this if the Device should send fax messages as UDP or TCP IP packets through IP networks This provides better quality but it may have inter operability problems The peer devices must also use T 38 Outbound Proxy Enable Select this if your VolP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls This allows the Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the Device to keep it from re translating the IP address since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server Server Port Enter the SIP outbound proxy server s listening port if your Vol P service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for SIP message transmissions Setting The Device creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to SIP traffic that it transmits RTP TOS Priority Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for RTP voice transmissions The Setting Device creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to RTP traffic that it transmits Timer Setting Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the SIP register Duration server before it is deleted The Device aut
179. Printer Port Wizard Add Port For which device do you want to add a port Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 1 1 Port Name IP_192 168 1 1 lt Back Next gt Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 7 Select Custom under Device Type and click Settings Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required RS The device could not be identified _ P The device is not found on the network Be sure that 1 The device is tumed on 2 The network is connected 3 The device is properly configured 4 The address on the previous page is correct If you think the address is not correct click Back to return to the previous page Then correct the address and perform another search on the network If you are sure the address is correct select the device type below Device Type O Standard 8 Confirm the IP address of the Device in the Printer Name or I P Address field 9 Select Raw under Protocol 10 The Port Number is automatically configured as 9100 Click OK to go back to the previous screen and click Next Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor 2 xl Port Settings Port Name Printer Name or IP Address gt Protocol Port Number 3100 M LPR Settings Gueue Name F LPR Byte Counting Enabled rT SNMP Status Enabled Community Name
180. Properties window Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 150 Windows Vista Start Menu Dr eye 7 0 Professional Connect To g Media Player Classic All Programs ale T 000 aad NM a 2 In the Control Panel click the Network and I nternet icon Figure 151 Windows Vista Control Panel E Control Panel G File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home Classic Vi System and Maintenance r Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security Check for updates Allow a program through Windows 7 Firewall etwork and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Set up file sharing p S User Accounts Change account type Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards o
181. R SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTI ON HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes Mini httpd under the license by ACME Labs Freeware ACME Labs Freeware License All the free software available on the ACME Labs web site has a copyright notice like this one Copyright 2000 by Jef Poskanzer lt jef mail acme com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRI BUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT INDI
182. RECT INCI DENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTI ALDAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTI ON HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements This Product includes glib libbase64 libiconv libusb and mhash under the LGPL License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LI CENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Sof
183. SE ARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRI BUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCI DENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTI ON HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLI GENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes mcrypt under GPL V3 License GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released
184. SET button for 5 seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 2 1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix C on page 329 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide Launch your web browser Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL A password screen displays Type admin as the default Username and 1234 as the default password to access the device s Web Configurator Click Login If you have changed the password enter your password and click Login Figure 5 Password Screen Welcome Welcome to P 2812HNUL F 1 configuration interface Please enter username and passwor
185. Secondary DNS Server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 Address This section is not available when you select Disable in the I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack field Obtain I Pv6 Address Automatically Select this option if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Enable Prefix Delegation Select this to enable Prefix Delegation This enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN Static I Pv6 Address Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Prefix length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the I Pv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon hexadecimal notation 6to4 Tunneling Select 6to4 if the Device is connected to a network that has both IPv6 and IPv4 and the IPv4 addresses are public IP addresses In this mode the Device can convert an IPv4 address directly to an IPv6 address The format is 2002 IPv4 address in hexadecimal 48 If you select this option the fields shown in Figure 20 appear 6RD Enable Select this option to enable IPv6 Rapid Deployment By enabling this functio
186. Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix E Common Services Table 109 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNI X server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal
187. Setup Wireless Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network NameSSID zjxEL 668D Hide SSID BSSID 02 13 49 11 66 8d Security Level More Secure Recommended OE 2 v v v 9 Security Mode WPA2 PSK v Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z and 0 9 or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key SJFY4TCVHF 48J more Apply Back The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 22 Wireless gt More AP Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless Select the Enable Wireless LAN check box to activate the wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 22 Wireless gt More AP Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a Name SSID wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is enabled Security Level Security Mode Select Basic WEP or More Secu
188. T ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 2 G Lite ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 3 G dmt bis ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 4 G lite bis I TU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits RFC 2383 ST2 over ATM Protocol Specification UNI 3 1 Version TR 069 TR 069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management TR 064 DSL Forum LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration 1 363 5 Compliant AAL5 SAR Segmentation And Re assembly P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Wall mounting Instructions Do the following to hang your Device on a wall Note See Table 89 on page 281 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them 1 Align the holes on the back of the supplied wall mounting bracket with the screws on the wall 2 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions Use a sturdy wall 3 Drill two holes on the wall with screws inserted in the wall mounting bracket The distance between the screws is 132 3mm Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws
189. TION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATI ONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATI ON ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYI NG WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATI ONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITI ONS OF THIS LI CENSE AGREEMENT 10 Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all know
190. TYPE MODE TYPE CONNECTION SETTINGS VDSL Routing PPPoE PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridge N A N A ADSL EoA Routing PPPoE PPPOA PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridge N A N A EtherWAN Routing PPPoE PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway IPoE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridge N A N A 5 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they sh
191. access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the Device does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC ba
192. achable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the Device s LAN interface The Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 73 Example of Static Routing Topology A R1 ES INTERNEJ R2 5 gt ROB pe cpm l im N l mE 5 NI l P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 173 Chapter 8 Routing 8 2 Configuring Static Route Use this screen to view and configure IP static routes on the Device Click Network Setting gt Static Route to open the following screen Figure 74 Network Setting gt Static Route Add New Static Route Active Status Name Destination IP Gateway SubnetMask Interface Modify 1 testi 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 EtherWAN1 4M The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Network Setting gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Add New Static Click this to set up a new static route on the Device Route This is the number of an individual static route Active This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this static route is active A gray bulb signifies that this
193. activate this parental control rule 208 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Parental Control Table 55 Add Edit Parental Control Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Control Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the rule Home Network User Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop down list box If you select Custom enter the LAN user s MAC address If you select All the rule applies to all LAN users Internet Access Schedule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control Time Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access Network Service Network Service Setting If you select Block the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below If you select Access the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below Add new service Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule You can configure the Service Name Protocol and Name of the new rule This shows the index number of the rule Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it Service Name This shows the name of the rule Protocol Port This shows the protocol and the port of the rule Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete a
194. ager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 189 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager Device Addresse C Statistics Received Transmitted Bytes 2317441 841875 MBytes 22 0 8 Packets 3621 3140 Errors 0 0 Dropped 0 0 KBytes s 0 0 0 0 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 327 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 190 Pop up Blocker Mail and Mews Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Setting Synchronize p een Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocki
195. ain Name System support you can use a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Device You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Logs Use logs for troubleshooting You can send logs from the Device to an external syslog server Universal Plug and Play UPnP A UPnP enabled device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network Firewall Your device has a stateful inspection firewall with DoS Denial of Service protection By default when the firewall is activated all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN The firewall supports TCP UDP inspection DoS detection and prevention real time alerts reports and logs MAC Address Filtering Your device can check the MAC addresses of clients against a list of allowed MAC addresses P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 90 Firmware Specifications continued
196. andwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR PPP Information This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and PPPoE or PPPOA in the WAN Service Type field PPP User Name Enter
197. ast domain Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control I nformation starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN con
198. asured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 596 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 596 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallw
199. ation and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the Device System Name Click Maintenance System to open the following screen Figure 123 Maintenance gt System Host Name router Domain Name nome Administrator Inactivity Timer o minutes 0 means no timeout Aooy cance P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 257 Chapter 21 System The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Maintenance gt System LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Type how many minutes a management session either via the web configurator Inactivity Timer can be left idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Apply Cli
200. ation of a PKS 7 file that contains a single certificate PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS Z7 This Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS 7 certificate into a printable form Note Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default 15 1 3 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the Device you should verify that you have the actual certificate This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the Device also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates 212 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates You can use a certificate s fingerprint to verify it A certificate s fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHAI1 algorithms The following procedure describes how to check a certificate s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate 1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer 2 Make sure that the certificate has a cer or crt file name extension Figure 94 Certificates on Your Computer ma EdLondon Office cer LZ LA office crt Certificates 3 Double click the certificate s icon to open the Certificate window Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumb
201. ation process by the RADIUS server and the client 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 204 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example a b Internet gt WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 205 WPA 2 PSK Authentication Un ss e 1 fv oo i i me gt f Internet Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security param
202. ations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS traffic blocking is disabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS traffic blocking is enabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 42 Basic Service set BSS G2 6 7 5 MBSSID Traditionally you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets BSSs As well as the cost of buying extra APs there is also the possibility of channel interference The Device s MBSSID Multiple Basic Service Set I Dentifier function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously You can then assign varying QoS priorities and or security modes to different SSIDs Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP 6 7 5 1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously You must use different keys for different BSSs If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs they are in different BSSs but have the same keys they may hear each other s communications but not communicate with each other MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802 1x security P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wir
203. ays and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 351 Appendix D Wireless LANs WiFi Protected Setup Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each
204. bandes de fr quences 2 4 GHz et ou 5 GHz conform ment la l gislation Europ enne En France m tropolitaine suivant les d cisions n 03 908 et 03 909 de l ARCEP la puissance d mission ne devra pas d passer 10 mW 10 dB dans le cadre d une installation WiFi en ext rieur pour les fr quences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483 5 MHz This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian I CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement wi
205. ble in the I Pv6 IPv4 DualStack field Obtain Pv6 Address Automatically Select this option if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Enable Prefix Delegation Select this to enable Prefix Delegation This enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN Static I Pv6 Address Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Prefix length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the I Pv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon hexadecimal notation 6to4 Tunneling Select 6to4 if the Device is connected to a network that has both IPv6 and IPv4 and the IPv4 addresses are public IP addresses In this mode the Device can convert an IPv4 address directly to an IPv6 address The format is 2002 IPv4 address in hexadecimal 48 If you select this option the fields shown in Figure 18 appear P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE VDSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 6RD Enable Select this option to enable IPv6 Rapid Deployment By ena
206. bling this function the Device uses an ISP s IPv6 address prefix instead of the 2002 48 prefix The operational domain of 6RD is limited to and controlled by the ISP s network 6RD hosts are ensured to be reachable from all native IPv6 addresses as 6RD only uses relay servers within control of the ISP This option is not available if your WAN Service Type is PPPoE 6to4 Tunneling Relay Server IP Enter the tunneling relay server s IPv4 address in this field If your WAN Service Type is PPPoE you need to enter this field in order to use 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Select whether you want to obtain the IPv6 DNS server addresses automatically or configure them manually Obtain I Pv6 DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary IPv6 DNS Server Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Secondary I Pv6 DNS Server Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 2 1 2 Routing IPoE VDSL Click the Add new WAN I nterface in the Network Setting Broadband screen or the Edit icon
207. cate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 105 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 54 Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the Device are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the Device identity P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your Device Table 106 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authent
208. cation types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an aut
209. cess the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 201 Basic Service Set gt mmm m m mom ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 202 Infrastructure WLAN Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing inte
210. cessful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentic
211. ck this to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 22 1 Overview You can configure the system s time and date in the Time Setting screen 22 2 The Time Setting Screen To change your Device s time and date click Maintenance Time The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the Device s time based on your local time zone Figure 124 Maintenance gt Time Setting Time Setting Current Date Time Current Time 03 34 19 Current Date 2000 01 01 Time and Date Setup Time Protocol NTP Time Server Address europe pool ntp org Time Zone Time Zone GMT 01 00 Berlin Stockholm Rome Bern Brussels Vienna z IV Daylight Savings Start Date Last Sun v Of March v 2000 03 26 at 1 o clock End Date Last x Sun x Of October v 2000 10 29 at 1 o clock Apply Reset The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 83 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date Time Current Time This field displays the time of your Device Current Date This field displays the date of your Device Time and Date Setup Time Protocol This shows the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Device Time Server Enter the IP address or URL up to 31 extended ASCII characters in length of Address your time
212. connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Device Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Device that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belo
213. connection status of the Device and clients connected to it Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device system resources interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN and SIP accounts You can also register and unregister SIP accounts If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the Device s ports See Section 2 2 2 on page 29 for more information 4 2 The Connection Status Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients A warning message appears if there is a connection problem P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info If you prefer to view the status in a list click List View in the Viewing mode selection box You can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval Figure 10 Connection Status Icon View P 41 5 Mee Language Encish INE Logout LAN Device E Viewing mode E Refresh Interval None l L Internet P 2812HNUL F1 Z a o Connection Status Figure 11 Connection Status List View ZyXEL P 2812HNUL F1 EENE English E ow ert vi LAN Device Viewing mode Refresh Interval None El MPT Device Name Rddress MACRddress Rares Source Connection Type In Icon View if you want to view information about a client click the client s name and Info Click the IP address if you want to chan
214. ct code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 403 Appendix G Open Software Announcements A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in whic
215. ction is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer 2 interface VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you DSL Link Type The DSL link type is set to EoA Ethernet over ATM to have an Ethernet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services EoA supports IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are e LLC SNAP BRI DGI NG In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when the DSL Link Type is set to EoA e VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload Service Category Select UBR Without PCR fo
216. d Out band traffic RFC 2833 Quick dialing through predefined phone book which maps the phone dialing number and destination URL Wireless Features Table 92 Wireless Features Internal Antenna The Device is equipped with two internal antennas to provide a clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points Multiple SSID Multiple SSID allows the Device to operate up to 4 different wireless networks simultaneously each with independently configurable wireless and security settings WEP Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private Wi Fi Protected Access Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i security standard Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption WPA2 WPA 2 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Other Wireless Features IEEE 802 11n Compliance Frequency Range 802 11b g n ISM Band 2 4 GHz Turn on off WLAN by WLAN button press the WLAN button for one second to turn the WLAN on or turn off IEEE 802 11e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Data Encryption 64 128 bit WLAN bridge to DSL Ethernet WAN IEEE 802 1x External RADIUS server P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Pro
217. d check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status System Info Host Name Model Name MAC Address Interface ADSL WAN Down N A Firmware Version 0 LAN 1 Up 1000Mbps WAN 1 Information JAN 1 LAN 2 Down NIA Mode LAN 3 Down N A IP Address ALL Down ALA IP Subnet Mask 3G Disabled NWA WAN 2 Information Mode IP Address LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DSL Up Time N A System Up Time Current Date Time Sat Jan 1 01 22 00 CET 2000 System Resource CPU Usage 1 0 Memory Usage DHCP Server Server DHCPv6 Server DHCPVv6 Relay WLAN Information Channel 6 WPS Status Configured 22 min SSID1 Information SSID SID Example3 Status on Security Mode WPA PSK D2 Information SSID ZyXEL 668D Status Off b Security Mode WPA2 PSK mixed Storage P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 37 Chapter 3 Tutorials This finishes the configuration of the AP 3 3 3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network 3 3 3 1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility as in the following diagram The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP There are three ways to connect the client to an access point Configure nothi
218. d to login Username Password El Login P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Note For security reasons the Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes default If this happens log in again 5 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password It is strongly recommended you change the default password Enter a new password retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now Figure 6 Change Password Screen Change Password itis highly recommended to setup a new password instead of using the default one for security concern New Password a VerifyNew Password 6 The Connection Status screen appears Figure 7 Connection Status ZyXEL P 2812HNUL F1 EA English l E Logout LAN Device B Viewing mode EA Refresh Interval None l L Internet P 2812HNUL F1 Connection Status 7 Click System Info to display the System Info screen where you can view the Device s interface and system information P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 2 The Web Configurator Layout Click Connection Status System Info to show the following screen Figure 8 Web Configurator Layout ZyXEL P 2812HNUL F1 Language English zI system into p None EE B fb
219. default 7 Click Apply to save your settings SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection ServiceProvider1 SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection SIP 1 General SIP Account IV Active SIP Account SIP Account Number fi 2345678 Authenticaton Username ChangeMe Password TTE a 3 5 1 2 SIP Account Registration Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account 1 Click Connection Status gt System Info to check if your SIP account has been registered successfully If the status is Not Registered check your Internet connection and click Register to register your SIP account Registration Status Account Action Account Status URI SIP 1 Cinese Not Registered 12345678 sip example com SIP 2 Register In Active ChangeMe sip example com P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 5 1 3 Analog Phone Configuration 1 Click Vol P Phone to open the Phone Device screen Click the Edit icon next to Analog Phone 1 to configure the first phone port Analog Phone 1 Analog Phone 1 12345678 2 Analog Phone 2 ChangeMe g 2 Select SIP 1 from the SIP Account in the SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call section to have the phone connected to the first phone port use the registered SIP 1 account to make outgoing calls 3 Select the SIP 1 check box in the SIP Account s to Receive Incoming Call section t
220. displays the maximum transmission rate when 3G is enabled or N A when 3G is disabled System Status DSL Up Time This field displays how long the DSL connection has been active System Up Time This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up The Device starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance Reboot or when you reset it see Section 1 7 on page 26 Current Date Time This field displays the current date and time in the Device You can change this in Maintenance Time Setting System Resource CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the Device is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory Usage This field displays what percentage of the Device s memory is currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 100 the Device is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Chapter 25 on page 267 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds USB Status Type This shows the type of device connected to the Device Status This shows whether the device is currently active Up This shows N A if there are no device connected
221. ditional Post Informalson Requued a The deven codi not be dertte a Thea denos is not found on the network Be sure that Y The device n tuned on 2 The netwerk is connected 3 The device is propesly conigured A The address on the pinvicus page is comeet IM yous think the addenss is not cemect click Back tn stum to the provieus page Then corect the eddies and perom another reach on the network I you ate sure the adders it correct sehe the doven lype bekow Deve Type C tandad Neira Custom Ser j TTE NS Port Name Adapter Type EE ng the Add Standard rinter Port Wizard ted a port with the following characteristics No LPR Ip1 192 168 1 2 IP 192168 1 2 To complete this wizard click Finish Add Port Delete Port Configure Port v Enable bidirectional support Enable printer pooling Ux Version Information Advanced HP LaserJet 8000 Canon iR5000 60 13 Repeat steps 1 to 12 to add this printer to other computers on your network Add a New Printer Using Wi ndows This example shows how to connect a printer to your Device using the Windows XP Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen Click Add a Printer Printers and Fa
222. dows 7 Local Area Connection Properties Networking Sharing Connect using Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items 9l Client for Microsoft Networks M E QoS Packet Scheduler M Fie an and Printer a for Microsoft Networks e Eom TCP IPvd Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper l O Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Thelnternet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens Figure 162 Windows 7 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP4 Properties 9 exem General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server E Validate settings upon exit n OK Cancel 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically
223. duct Specifications The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Device Table 93 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2766 Network Address Translation Protocol IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11n Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band and 5 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL standard G dmt G 992 1 G 992 1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL Transceivers ITU G 992 1 G DM
224. e Have Disk Tell me why driver signing is important P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 16 If the following screen displays select Keep existing driver radio button and click Next if you already have a printer driver installed on your computer and you do not want to change it Otherwise select Replace existing driver to replace it with the new driver you selected in the previous screen and click Next Add Printer Wizard Use Existing Driver driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing driver HP DeskJet 1220C or use the new one O Replace existing driver 17 Type a name to identify the printer and then click Next to continue Add Printer Wizard Name Your Printer You must assign a name to this printer Type a name for this printer Because some programs do not support printer and server name combinations of more than 31 characters it is best to keep the name as short as possible Printer name HHP DeskJet 1220C Do you want to use this printer as the default printer Yes O No P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 18 The Device is a print server itself and you do not need to have your computer act as a print server by sharing the printer with other users in the same network just select Do not share this printer and click Next to proceed to the following screen Add Printer Wizard Printer
225. e as well as the relevant user and authorization data A SIP registration has a limited lifespan The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan If it does not do so the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar s database and the connection broken The Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled the Device attempts to register the port immediately Authorization Requirements SIP registrations and subsequent SIP requests require a username and password for authorization These credentials are validated via a challenge response system using the HTTP digest mechanism as detailed in RFC3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol SIP Servers SIP is a client server protocol A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests A SIP server responds to the SIP requests When you use SIP to make a VoIP call it originates at a client and terminates at a server A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls This means that SIP can be used for peer to peer communications even though it is a client server protocol In the following figure either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call A and B can also both act as a SIP user a
226. e Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may hap
227. e Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it
228. e Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI CABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTI ON 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLI CABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRI GHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTI AL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF T
229. e View Play Tools Help QUO gt P 2812HNU F1 gt Videos gt All Videos Play Organize v Stream v Create playlist v Ee v Search Title Length Release yea Genre Actors Rating Size E Library E Playlists a a 4 fa Music a a T 7 m 2 Artist bed ZyXEL Celebration ZyXEL Connecting the gt Album bel Video bel Future A Genre Lj 4 es 33 minutes xii a PE Unknown Bj Videos E reus MI m Recorded TV Play next Add to gt fP Other Libraries 4 P P 2812HNU F1 Edit dd Music Rate gt Bj Videos a T Properties Pictures Recorded TV 3 7 3 Using a Digital Media Adapter This section shows you how you can use the Device with a ZyXEL DMA 2500 to play media files stored in the USB storage device in your TV screen Note For this tutorial your DMA 2500 should already be set up with the TV according to the instructions in the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Connect the DMA 2500 to an available LAN port in your Device I USB Storage Device p WA DMA 2500 ZyXEL Device 2 Turn on the TV and wait for the DMA 2500 Home screen to appear Using the remote control go to MyMedia to open the following screen Select the Device as your media server T 01 P28 12HNUL F1 ff 02 TWPC 13262 01 3 The screen shows you the list of available media files in the USB storage device Select the file you want to open and push the Play button in
230. e client s discretion T2 T 1 l I e a l Ren Ren Rone Rene Repel Mari 10 isi o S2 ELA TUE i Rebind rd to ST amp toS toS DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote ID option and the interface ID option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface ID option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface D should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The Device uses the received Pv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Throug
231. e default router list or routing table Once the next hop IP address is known the Device looks into the neighbor cache to get the link layer address and sends the packet when the neighbor is reachable If the Device cannot find an entry in the neighbor cache or the state for the neighbor is not reachable it starts the address resolution process This helps reduce the number of IPv6 solicitation and advertisement messages Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from IPv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses I CMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router o
232. e drop down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoA ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Service Type This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select PPPOA as the method of encapsulation used by your ISP PPP over ATM PPPOA PPPoA allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC Configuration IPv6 IPv4 Select Enable to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time If DualStack this function is disabled the Device only runs IPv4 ATM PVC VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit This section is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer 2 interface VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you DSL Link Type The DSL link type is set to PPPoA PPP over ATM to allow just one PPPoA connection over a PVC Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are LLC SNAP BRI DGI NG n LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type
233. e fields shown in Figure 24 appear 6RD Enable Select this option to enable IPv6 Rapid Deployment By enabling this function the Device uses an ISP s IPv6 address prefix instead of the 2002 48 prefix The operational domain of 6RD is limited to and controlled by the ISP s network 6RD hosts are ensured to be reachable from all native IPv6 addresses as 6RD only uses relay servers within control of the ISP This option is not available if your WAN Service Type is PPPoE or PPPoA 6to4 Tunneling Relay Server IP Enter the tunneling relay server s IPv4 address in this field If your WAN Service Type is PPPoE or PPPOA you need to enter this field in order to use 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Select whether you want to obtain the IPv6 DNS server addresses automatically or configure them manually Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary IPv6 DNS Server Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP Secondary IPv6 Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 107 Chapter 5 Broadband
234. e information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read http www gnu org philosophy why not Igpl html2 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements This Product includes popt under the following License Copyright c 1998 Red Hat Software Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EV
235. e it considers the call is unanswered Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 16 4 Multiple SIP Accounts You can set up two SIP accounts on your Device and your Device is equipped with two phone ports By default SIP1 of the Device maps to phone port 1 for incoming and outgoing and SIP2 maps to phone port 2 for incoming and outgoing 16 5 The Common Screen Use the Common screen to configure RFC3262 support on the Device To access the following screen click VolP gt SIP gt Common Figure 103 VolP gt SIP gt Common Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name AnyWAN RFC Support PRACK RFC 3262 Supported M Session Timer RFC 4028 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Each field is described in the following table Table 63 VolP gt SIP gt Common LABEL DESCRIPTION Bound Interface Name Bound Interface If you select AnyWAN the Device automatically activates the VolP service when Name any WAN connection is up If you select MultiWAN you also need to select the pre configured WAN connections The VoIP service is activated only when one of the selected WAN connections is up RFC Support PRACK RFC RFC 3262 defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP 3262 provisional response messages which convey information on the processing progress of the request This uses
236. e logs and alert messages You can select the type of log and level of severity to display Figure 114 System Monitor gt Log gt Phone Log s d iv Level All iv Refresh Clear Logs Time Level o Message 1 Aug 20 07 37 17 err SIP Registration SIP 12875 Register Fail error cause 43 2 Aug 20 07 37 40 info ChangeMe FX82 Phone Event OFFHOOK 3 Aug 20 07 37 43 info ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event ONHOOK 4 Aug 20 07 37 43 info ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event idle 5 Aug 20 07 39 05 info ChangeMe FX82 Phone Event OFFHOOK 6 Aug 20 07 39 28 info ChangeMe FX82 Phone Event ONHOOK 7 Aug 20 07 39 28 info ChangeMe FX82 Phone Event idle 8 Aug 20 07 41 14 info SIP Registration SIP 128752 Register Success 9 Aug 20 07 41 49 info ChangeMe FXS2 Phone Event OFFHOOK 10 Aug 20 07 41 56 info ChangeMe FX82 Phone Event ONHOOK The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 73 System Monitor gt Log gt Phone Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a category of logs to view from the drop down list box select All Logs to view all logs Level Select the severity level that you want to view Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Clear Logs Click this to delete all the logs This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Level This field displays the severity level of the logs
237. e right panel shows you the media files in the USB storage device attached to your Device Windows 7 Open Windows Media Player It should automatically detect the Device O Windows Media Player File View Play Tools Help QU gt P 2812HNU F4 gt Organize v Stream v Create playlist v c Music E Library p Playlists 4 JI Music P Artist B Videos Recorded TV L Playlists Pictures gt Album Genre Bj Videos Pictures Recorded TV P Other Libraries dd Music Bj Videos Pictures Recorded TV If you cannot see the Device in the left panel as shown above right click Other Libraries gt Refresh Other Libraries P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Select a category in the left panel and wait for Windows Media Player to connect to the Device G Windows Media Player q File View Play Tools Help GO gt P 2812HNU F1 Music gt All music Play Burn Organize v Stream v Create playlist v Album Length Rating Contributing artist E Library e Playlists 4 JJ Music P Artist Album Contacting the remote media library o Cancel Genre fi Videos O Pictures Recorded TV P Other Libraries 4 P P 2812HNU F1 dd Music H Videos Pictures Recorded TV 3 Inthe right panel you should see a list of files available in the USB storage device G Windows Media Player Fil
238. e static IP address provided by your ISP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP Routing Feature NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Default Gateway Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway DNS Server This is available only when you select Apply as Default Gateway in the Routing Feature field Obtain DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table8 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE VDSL EtherWAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use the following Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure Static DNS IP manually Address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server
239. eck if an incoming call s destination number matches your SIP account s SIP number In order to make or receive a VoIP call you need to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port The SIP account contains information that allows your Device to connect to your VoIP service provider P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP See Section 16 3 on page 224 for how to map a SIP account to a phone port To access the following screen click VoIP SIP SIP Account Figure 101 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account Add new SIP account 1 SIP 1 ChangeMe ChangeMe 27 2 SIP 2 ChangeMe ChangeMe 4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Active This shows whether the SIP account is activated or not A yellow bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated A gray bulb signifies that this SIP account is activated SIP Account This shows the name of the SIP account SIP Service This shows the name of the SIP service provider Provider Account No This shows the SIP number Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SIP account Click the Delete icon to delete this SIP account from the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 16 3 1 Add Edit SIP Account You can configure a new SIP account or edit o
240. ect a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies E P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 1 3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens ask yourself the following questions See Section 6 7 on page 137 if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support IEEE 802 11g for example What is the most appropriate standard to use What security options do the other wireless devices support WPA PSK for example What is the best one to use Do the other wireless devices support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup If so you can set up a well secured network very easily Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non WPS devices manually although this is somewhat more complicated to do What advanced options do you want to configure if any If you want to configure advanced options ensure that you know precisely what you want to do If you do not want to configure advanced options leave them alone 6 2 The Wireless General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the Device s SSID or security settin
241. ected Subnet Mask e AirPort i off z Router DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 Advanced am a Advanced id Click the lock to prevent further changes NF 6 Click Apply and close the window P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 317 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications Utilities Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 174 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility eoo Network Utility Info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan Please erface for information Network Interface en1 HK r 0 Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the st
242. ed to you Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are e LLC SNAP BRI DGI NG In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header e VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the Device needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload Service Category Select UBR Without PCR for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Constant Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR
243. eet aderire ud Neg ca im in ER eee NO EC DS 249 18 5 The 3G Backup Taus SOP cpm 250 18 6 The VolP Status Sreem eusir IRR D ab nn uma naa A cuoi ER Eaa aaa x aA 251 Chapter 19 Ig ers MID TETTE OSEE annda arbera n a aa aian aaan 253 CEE so Mee a A 253 19 2 The Usor Accam SOEN arannskinninanss rini d e I et ainin aTa NS 253 Chapter 20 Romolo MOMI ciai ia aaa 255 20 T ONAN oean a EEUU 255 20 1 1 What You Negd fo KNOW 15 urs pieni ari ia a 255 20 2 The Remote MGMT Screen 2 iiec timete cn mcd guo sme SR ERE X c XR BER kane dud duces FERE KR n Rua 256 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 21 lij M 257 VET E M TNT cn eases wanna aan 257 213 1 What You Need to KNOW Lciacccossirciccsean pictis mte cc cquRI CE ee cua N E ee CEU taa er coo om E rec UD M eG cO 257 NL URE Re 1 NT TOES 257 Chapter 22 Time Seling RR 259 ESSA MT 259 22 2 The Time Soling SNB sisi RP Ode va oun d Nc ano au PN KR 259 Chapter 23 Wa Ec cll ms ne ep Bs Ee eS rete ene E EnC ERE ETC ee en 261 PCR EE cr Sassen tan ETE mee TE 261 sue He Log Seb SCE irinn aae a aide aet anaes 261 Chapter 24 uii 10 263 2A i IE i NE st ake Cn Stn thw ead RT 263 24 2 The Firmware Upgrade Dreo esrardan EE E 263 Chapter 25 BACKUP FOSIONG YYA A
244. eless 6 7 6 WiFi Protected Setup WPS Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves 6 7 6 1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another Look for a WPS
245. eless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 6 7 2 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless dev
246. ell as phone features TYPE II CPEs support 2 FXS ports design which allows users to make 2 VoIP phone calls at the same time Multiple SIP Accounts You can simultaneously use multiple voice SIP accounts and assign them to the telephone port up to two accounts Echo Cancellation You device supports G 168 an I TU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Comfort Noise Generation Your device generates background noise to fill moments of silence when the other device in a call stops transmitting because the other party is not speaking as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Dynamic Jitter Buffer The built in adaptive buffer helps to smooth out the variations in delay jitter for voice traffic This helps ensure good voice quality for your conversations Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD reduces the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting when you are not speaking Caller ID The Device supports caller ID which allows you to see the originating number of an incoming call on a phone with a suitable display Call Return With call return you can place a call to the last number that called you either answered or missed The last incoming call can be through either SIP or PSTN Multiple Voice Your device can simultaneously handle m
247. en the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is O then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 94 P Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST OCTET E ENET 4TH OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 95 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL 1ST OCTET 2ND OCTET 3RD OCTET 4TH OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00
248. eps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 1 Click System Administration Network Figure 175 Ubuntu 8 System gt Administration Menu System ZK Preferences 12 Administration gt SS Authorizations B Hardware Drivers 4 Help and Support lt di ALAE CNONE Hardware Testing Abou rl Language Support About Ubuntu A Login Window Quit Bs Network Network Tools P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Figure 176 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections ngs x af te NetwD Location lt Connections General DNS Hosts Wired connection D I roperties Roaming mode enabled Point to point connec This network interface is not c 3 In the Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button Figure 177 Ubuntu 8 Administrator Account Authentication Authenticate x h ys System policy prevents 3 modifying the configuration An application is attempting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of
249. er types of encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your Device you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the Device Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 6 7 3 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 7 4 BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless st
250. eral SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Name SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain RTP Port Range Start Port End Port DTMF Mode DTMF Mode Transport Type Transport Type FAX Option 6711 Fax Passthrough Outbound Proxy Enable Server Address Server Port QoS Tag SIP TOS Priority Setting RTP TOS Priority Setting Timer Setting Expiration Duration Register Re send timer Session Expires Min SE Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection PSTN Fail Over ChangeMe x Delete M Enable SIP Service Provider ChangeMe SS 050 1025 65535 angeMe 060 1025 65535 ange 060 1025 65535 angeMe 50000 1025 65535 65535 1025 65535 RFC 2833 UDP x C T38 Fax Relay 1025 65535 fo 0 255 p 0 255 B600 60 65535 second 12 180 85535 second Bao o 100 3600 second o 90 1800 second 3 second Fall back to PSTN when SIP is unregistered or SIP call fail hide more P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 VolP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you
251. erprise 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 157 Windows 7 Start Menu S Snipping Tool Calculator Computer Control Panel lt a XPS Viewer E Devices and Printers E Windows Fax and Scan Default Programs Aw Magnifier gt All Programs Help and Support RIS 2 Inthe Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and I nternet category Figure 158 Windows 7 Control Panel Adjust your computer s settings System and Security 8e Back up your computer Find and fix problems ax up and sharing options Hardware and Sound 3 IM View devices and printers ie Add a device mi Programs Uninstall a program A gt Control Panel v View by Category Y User Accounts and Family Safety Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change esktop background Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display 3 Click Change adapter settings Figure 159 Windows 7 Network And Sharing Center GO 5E gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v 4t Control Panel Home gt View your basic network information and set up connections Manage wireless networks a A Je e
252. ers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 49 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host 10 4 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a Telnet server on
253. erview Hostname DNS jJ Routing m Hostname and Domain Name Hostname Domain Name linux h2oz site Change Hostname via DHCP C Write Hostname to etc hosts interfaces not just this one The domain is especially important if this computer is a mail server If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your host which can be seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect 4 to different networks m X Change etc resolv conf manually m Name Servers and Domain Search List Domain Search Name Server 1 10 0 2 3 Name Server 2 Name Server 3 _ Update DNS data via DHCP 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection I nformation Figure 188 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager 7 Disable Wireless v 3 Switch to Offline Mode 4 Show Connection Information Sy Configur 44 KNetworkManager a Wired Devices Ak X Wired Network X Options P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Dial Up Connections Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address When the Connection Status KNetwork Man
254. es Description TCP IP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Cox cae 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen 5 Select Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 6 Usethe ipconfig command to check your dynamic I Pv6 address This example shows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPv6 Address ES Link local IPv6 Address IPv4 Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway 2001 50021 2d 1000 fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 172 16 100 61 255 2554255 0 fe80 213 49ff feaa 7125 211 172 16 100 254 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 373 Appendix F IPv6 374 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for P 2812HNUL Fx WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT
255. es 245 INVITE request 250 number 246 proxy server 247 redirect server 248 register server 249 servers 247 service domain 246 URI 245 user agent 247 version 2 316 SMTP error messages 278 SNMP 313 speed dial 243 SRA 312 SSID 139 activation 132 MBSSID 142 stateful inspection 311 static route 179 static VLAN status 87 status indicators 26 storage humidity 309 storage temperature 309 subnet 321 subnet mask 165 322 subnetting 324 supplementary services 252 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 100 105 109 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 114 syntax conventions 5 system firmware 289 passwords 30 status 87 System Info 89 system name 89 272 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP IP port 61 Telnet 25 temperature 309 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol see TKIP The 95 three way conference 254 thresholds data fragment 138 RTS CTS 138 TKIP 383 ToS 251 TPID 116 traffic shaping 114 transparent bridging 313 trusted CAs and certificates 224 tutorial VoIP 51 wireless 40 Type of Service see ToS U unicast 117 Uniform Resource Identifier 245 Universal Plug and Play see UPnP upgrading firmware 289 UPnP 158 forum 153 security issues 153 USB features 24 USB printer 24 V VAD 228 315 version firmware P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index version 90 VID Virtual Circuit VC 114 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN Virtual Local Area Network see V
256. eserved for TRO69 connection request port The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 46 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new rule Click this to add a new port forwarding rule This is the index number of the entry Status This field indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Service Name This is the service s name This shows User Defined if you manually added a service You can change this by clicking the edit icon WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded Start Port This is the first external port number that identifies a service End Port This is the last external port number that identifies a service Translation Start This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Port Translation End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Server IP Address This is the server s IP address Protocol This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server whether it is TCP UDP or TCP UDP Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the port forwarding rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save
257. ess Point 375 Application Layer Gateway 316 applications Internet access 22 media server 161 activation 162 iTunes server 161 VoIP 23 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 297 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 see AAL5 audience 3 authentication 138 140 RADIUS server 140 auto dial 314 automatic logout 30 auto negotiating rate adaptation 312 Index backup configuration 291 bandwidth management 187 Basic Service Set see BSS blinking LEDs 26 Broadband 93 broadcast 117 BSS 141 373 example 142 BYE request 250 C CA 219 381 call forwarding 315 call hold 254 call park and pickup 314 call return 314 call rule 243 call service mode 253 call transfer 254 call waiting 254 314 caller ID 315 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CBR Constant Bit Rate 100 105 108 certificate factory default 223 Certificate Authority see CA certificates 219 CA 219 replacing 223 storage space 223 thumbprint algorithms 222 thumbprints 222 trusted CAs 224 225 verifying fingerprints 221 Certification Authority see CA P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index certifications 425 notices 425 viewing 426 CFI 117 channel 375 interference 375 channel scan 125 channel wireless LAN 123 Class of Service 251 Class of Service see CoS client list 156 client server protocol 247 codecs 316 comfort noise generation 228 315 command interface 25 configuration 164 backup 291 reset 293 restoring 292 copyright 425
258. eters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 108 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY Ede Aer SM IEEE 802 1X N METHOD MANUAL KEY P MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 119 or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain me
259. evice has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate this equipment FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter EEE 802 11b 802 11g or 802 11n 20MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited
260. exidecimal digits more hide Click more to show more fields in this section Click hide more to hide them more P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EJ Chapter 6 Wireless Table 19 Wireless gt General WPA 2 PSK continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA PSK This field appears when you choose WPA PSK2 as the Security Mode Compatible Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA PSK security mode to connect to your Device The Device supports WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously Encryption If the security mode is WPA PSK the encryption mode is set to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP security on your wireless network If the security mode is WPA PSK2 and WPA PSK Compatible is disabled the encryption mode is set to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System AES security on your wireless network AES provides superior security to TKIP If the security mode is WPA PSK2 and WPA PSK Compatible is enabled the encryption mode is set to TKI PAES MI X to allow both TKIP and AES types of security in your wireless network 6 2 4 WPA 2 Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol Use this security option for maximum protection of your network However it is the least backwards compatible with older
261. f bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist Refer to the ITU T G 992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels Reset DSL Click this button to reinitialize the DSL line The large text box above then displays the Line progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 271 Chapter 26 Diagnostic 272 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 27 Troubleshooting 27 1 Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Device Access and Login Internet Access Wireless Internet Access Phone Calls and VoIP USB Device Connection UPnP 27 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Device does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on
262. ffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic 9 6 2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1p prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest 9 6 3 DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet t
263. ffic flow Monitor Use this screen to view each queue s statistics NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world Sessions Use this screen to limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Services Use this screen to set the default action to take on outgoing network traffic MAC Filter MAC Filter Use this screen to allow specific devices to access the Device Parental Parental Control Use this screen to define time periods and days during which Control the Device performs parental control and or block web sites with the specific URL Certificates Local Certificates Use this screen to generate and export self signed certificates or certification requests and import the Device s CA signed certificates Trusted CA Use this screen to save CA certificates to the Device VoIP SIP SIP Service Use this screen to configure your Device s Voice over IP Provider settings SIP Account Use this screen to set up information about your SIP account and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the Device Common Use this screen to configure RFC3262 support on the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 2 In
264. fic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 10 1 Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 10 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Usethe Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 10 2 on page 190 Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client can use Section on page 192 10 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Inside Outside and Global Local Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side NAT In the simplest form
265. figurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between GMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Device periodically updates this information DNS Server
266. fix Delegation This enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN Static I Pv6 Address Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Prefix length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP IPv6 Default Gateway Enter the I Pv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using a colon hexadecimal notation 6to4 Tunneling Select 6to4 if the Device is connected to a network that has both IPv6 and IPv4 and the IPv4 addresses are public IP addresses In this mode the Device can convert an IPv4 address directly to an IPv6 address The format is 2002 IPv4 address in hexadecimal 48 If you select this option the fields shown in Figure 22 appear 6RD Enable Select this option to enable IPv6 Rapid Deployment By enabling this function the Device uses an ISP s IPv6 address prefix instead of the 2002 48 prefix The operational domain of 6RD is limited to and controlled by the ISP s network 6RD hosts are ensured to be reachable from all native IPv6 addresses as 6RD only uses relay servers within control of the ISP This option is not available if your WAN Service Type is PPPoE or PPPoA 6to4 Tunneling Relay Server IP Enter the tunneling relay server s IPv4 addre
267. following table describes the fields in this screen Table 48 Network Setting gt NAT gt Sessions LABEL DESCRIPTION MAX NAT Session Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions each client computer can have If only a few clients use peer to peer applications you can raise this number to improve their performance With heavy peer to peer application use lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 10 4 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter 10 4 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 193 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local ref
268. font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Device icon is not an exact representation of your device Device Computer Notebook computer Ss Server Firewall Telephone Router Switch P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store th
269. for the destination N2 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Type 192 168 1 253 R s N1 address in the Gateway IP Address field M Active Route Name Fonz Destination IP Address io2468100 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 1923681253 Bound Interface NotAvailiable p Click Apply The Routing screen should display the route you just added Add New Static Route Active Status MName Destination IP Gateway Subnet Mask Interface Modify 1 7 V To N2 192 168 10 0 192 168 1 253 255 255 255 0 LAN brO 3 I Now B should be able to receive traffic from A You may need to additionally configure B s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through 3 11 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen Note Voice traffic will not be affected by the user defined QoS settings on the Device It always gets the highest priority Let s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office You want to prioritize e mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour You also upload data files such as logs and e mail archives to the FTP server throughout the day Your colleagues use the Internet for research as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices In the following figure your Internet connection
270. function is disabled the Device only runs IPv4 VLAN This section is available only when you select VDSL or EtherWAN in the Type field Enable VLAN Select this to add the VLAN tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection Enter 802 1P Priority IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1p priority level from 0 to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection IP Address This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and I PoE in the WAN Service Type field Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address Address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Automatically Internet Select this if you have a dynamic IP address Enable DHCP Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the Device in DHCP Option 60 requests that the Device sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address Vendor Class Enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 such as the type of the hardware Identifier or firmware Static IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address IP Address Enter th
271. g client share a common password in order to validate the connection This type of encryption while robust is not as strong as WPA WPA2 or even WPA2 PSK The WPA2 PSK security mode is a newer more robust version of the WPA encryption standard It offers slightly better security although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be Click Network Settings gt Wireless to display the General screen Select More Secure as the security level Then select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 35 Wireless gt General More Secure WPA 2 PSK Security Level More Secure Recommended v v v Ee Security Mode WPA2 PSK v Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z and 0 8 or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key RIOWTENKNM49VWr hide more WPA PSK Compatible Enable C Disable Encryption TKIPAES MIX The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Wireless gt General WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Select More Secure to enable WPA 2 PSK data encryption Security Mode Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA WPA2 and WPA PSK WPA2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters or 64 h
272. ge VDSL EtherWAN LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select VDSL or EtherWAN as the interface that you want to configure VDSL The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port EtherWAN The Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use routing functions such as QoS Firewall DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port s VLAN This section is available only when you select VDSL or EtherWAN in the Type field Enable VLAN Select this to add the VLAN Tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection Enter 802 1P IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a Priority MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1p priority level from O to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level Enter 802 1Q VLAN Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection ID P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 12 Broadband Add Edit Bridge VDSL EtherWAN
273. ge it If you want to change the name or icon of the client click Change name icon In List View you can also view the client s information EB P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info 4 3 The System Info Screen Click Connection Status System Info to open this screen Figure 12 System Info Screen ZyXEL P 2812HNUL F1 ETE English MI NER System Info bs 177777 emma Floor Nam rouer Interface Status Rate Model Name P 2812HNUL F1 MAC Address 49 11 66 8f VOSEWAN Down NU Up 1000Mbps Firmware Version 3 10 TUJ 0 b4 WAN 1 Information VDSL WAN 1 Down N A Down N A Mode Down N A IP Address IP Subnet Mask Up 300Mbps Disabled N A LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP Server Server DHCPv6 Server DHCPv6 Relay WLAN Information DSL Up Time NIA Channel 11 System Up Time 1 day 6 19 WPS Status Unconfigured Current Date Time Sun Jan 2 07 19 54 CET 2000 SSID1 Information System Resource SSID Y CPU Usage 2 0 Status Security Mode Memory Usage SSID2 Information SSID ZyXEL_668D Status Off Security Mode WPA2 PSK mixed SSID3 Information SSID ZyXEL_668E Status Off Storage Security Mode WPA2 PSK mixed Printer SSID4 Information SSID ZyXEL 668F Status Security Mode WPA2 PSK mixed ouai None xi Account Action Account Status URI SIP 1 Registe
274. gent to receive the call Figure 109 SIP User Agent s B SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C 1 The client device A in the figure sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 235 Chapter 16 VoIP 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C Figure 110 SIP Proxy Server A SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C 1 Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B 2 The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C s IP address or domain name P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 3 Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C Figure 111 SIP Redirect Server SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity to IP add
275. ght holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
276. gs P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Firewall 12 1 Overview Use the Device firewall screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it By default the firewall Allows traffic that originates from your LAN and WLAN computers to go to all other networks Blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN and WLAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 88 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN D INTERNEJ 12 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable or disable the Device s firewall Section 12 2 on page 200 MI Use the Services screen to view the configured firewall rules and add edit or remove a firewall rule Section 12 3 on page 201 12 1 2 What You Need to Know Firewall The Device s firewall feature physically separates the LAN WLAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks It is designed to protect against Denial of Service DoS attacks when activated The Device s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet P 2812
277. gs you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the Device s new settings Click Network Setting gt Wireless to open the General screen Select the Enable Wireless LAN checkbox to show the Wireless configurations Figure 32 Network Setting gt Wireless gt General Wireless Network Setup Wireless M Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID EyxEL 668c Hide SSID BSSID 02 13 49 11 66 8c Mode Select 802 11b g n vj Channel Selection Channel 11 vj Scan Operating Channel 11 Security Level No Security v v v Apply Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 125 Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Network Setup Wireless Select the Enable Wireless LAN check box to activate the wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless The SSID Service Set IDentity identifies the service set with which a wireless Network Name device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must SSID have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain
278. guration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced OK Cancel Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP I P Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Ent
279. h many computers are attached A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address subnet mask and DHCP settings Section 7 2 on page 152 Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Section 7 3 on page 153 Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP Section 7 4 on page 155 Use the File Sharing screen to enable file sharing server Section 7 5 on page 155 Use the Media Server screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files Section 7 6 on page 158 Use the Printer Server screen to enable the print server Section 7 7 on page 159 7 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter 7 1 2 1 About LAN IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number This is known as an Internet Protocol address P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask compu
280. h sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by multicast the Device passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 367 Appendix F IPv6 ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4 ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6 Pv6 nodes use I CMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP The Neighbor Discovery Protocol NDP is a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices and track neighbor s reachability in a network An IPv6 device uses the following ICMPv6 messages types Neighbor solicitation A request from a host to determine a neighbor s link layer address MAC address and detect if the neighbor is still reachable A neighbor being reachable means it responds to a neighbor solicitation message from the host with a neighbor advertisement message Neighbor advertisement A response from a node to announce its link layer address Router solicitation A request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets Router advertisement A response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a ro
281. h the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide
282. has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10 000 kbps For this example you want to configure QoS so that e mail traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5 000 kbps You can do the following Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue 7 to e mail traffic from the LAN interface so that e mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion e Note the IP address 192 168 1 23 for example and or MAC address AA FF AA FF AA FF for example of your computer and map it to queue 7 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Note QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the Device Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the Device ZyXEL Device DSL 10 000 kbps Your computer IP 192 168 1 23 and or MAC AA FF AA FF AA FF D E mail Queue 7 A colleague s computer Other traffic Automatic classifier Click Network Setting QoS General and check Active Set your WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10 000 kbps or leave this blank to have the Device automatically determine this figure Click Apply to save your settings M Active QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth 10000 kbps Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None bd B Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically If Enable QoS checkbo
283. he CRI Ple DO BEBE aaeei om Ede Sn Cabo mex Hla uses Eu Emu DEED Lo Med t see bcd CAU 231 10 9 The FXO Screen L Modele CODI sirsie kna kann ada nET AAN dua dS 233 16 10 Technical ReierontE sacras EA E E EARE 233 TETA yP anana te ua ade er taces a on Plon ER 234 LOO LU EERE 2 SER eeeamentate eer eet Umer a CAE PIE MEINEM TIME CM LE qud Sd 234 16 70 38 Quality Of Senice Q05 csccocrcescicssiecedscchcabiniastcascmeannadeatedduaseiiaresacinaairacseneinneeinstads 238 16 104 Phone Services OUBIVIGW 1o rite ipe t a na oa ecce csl apt d dn 239 Chapter 17 LOGS Av H 243 ECUDUSDSN Gostescndstestendo Dtetdnctitelu ici stet taque bebe ta E AD ied cc ree 243 17 321 What You Gar Do im this Chapit acusa a peor orani a POTERE ER a nc pcs 243 14712 Whiar Yeu ios To DIM cock cx ia esa dapi nter co adicere Ra ni tds 243 TE The Gyoteni Log BOGEN emer te epee ert ies e Iste pel ere ete eee sere 244 212 5 Tha Phone LOD SOEN uices atia Orr rage aa n P PED re Pert iue aca a 245 T2735 The Val ial AOR SORIBIT ope itistt put il eU pese Ut AAEE NSR 245 Chapter 18 TER RTT AOD cai mter H 247 DDANBAU SIC T UN 247 19 1 1 What You Cen Do inthis Chapter cisaissueneddeudamed o tbreuki xRe dub a tab Esdr ec 247 po EV ECC UEE I A T E o OSEE 247 TS The LAN SISUS STW ces ith ptr er ei d Rc n a Hte a pete a prada ad at Lider 248 T54 The NAT Staus DU Woosh dca Seta dace oe do
284. he extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate ins
285. he mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 97 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation wm aa SRMESCU eme 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 140 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting E r I Se i 1 i I i i L Internet I i i E Ea E QJ g a I v 192 168 1 0 24 a 4 um um um m m m m m m m m um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168
286. he password 1 The default admin password is 1234 and the default user password is 1234 2 Ifyou can t remember the password you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 7 on page 26 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address Section on page 161 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the Device 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 329 274 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Device with the default IP address See Section 1 7 on page 26 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Device using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Device check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not respond to HTTP f your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a co
287. he rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those
288. he specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user 14 2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control view the parental control rules and schedules Click Security Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 92 Security gt Parental Control General Parental Control Add new PCP C Enable Disable settings are invalid when disabled PCP1 All EIESEJESESIIEBE 1 30 23 59 configured None 40 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 54 Parental Control gt Parental Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Parental Control Select Enable to activate parental control Add new PCP Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule This shows the index number of the rule Status This indicates whether the rule is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active PCP Name This shows the name of the rule Home Network This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this rule User MAC applies Internet Access This shows the day s and time on which parental control is enabled Schedule Network Service This shows whether the network service is configured If not None will be shown P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 207
289. hen when WPS is activated P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method 1 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices 2 Access the WPS section of the AP s configuration interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this 3 Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 133 4 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s configuration interface 5 If the client device s configuration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can either enter the client s PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which 6 Start WPS on both devices within two minutes 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configu
290. hentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a
291. her IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is activated or not for this connection IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 6 Network Setting gt Broadband continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Gateway This shows whether the Device uses the interface of this connection as the system default gateway Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the connection Click the Delete icon to delete this connection from the Device A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the connection 5 2 1 Add Edit Internet Connection Use this screen to configure a WAN connection The screen varies depending on the interface type encapsulation and WAN service type you select 5 2 1 1 Routing PPPoE VDSL EtherWAN Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select VDSL or EtherWAN as the interface type Routing as the encapsulation mode and PPPoE as the WAN service type Figure 17 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE VDSL EtherWAN Sene Routing Feature Name Ll NAT Enable r ne Mos sj IGMP Proxy Enable Hn Moe Routing i Apply as Default Gateway rH WANServ
292. his License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EB Appendix G Open Software Announcements any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Fre
293. his column displays each interface the Device has P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Table4 System Info Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field indicates whether or not the Device is using the interface For the DSL interface this field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For the WAN interface this field displays Up when the Device is using the interface and Down when the Device is not using the interface For the LAN interface this field displays Up when the Device is using the interface and Down when the Device is not using the interface For the WLAN interface it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled For the 3G interface it displays Enabled when 3G is enabled or Disabled when 3G is disabled Rate For the LAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N A when WLAN is disabled For the 3G interface it
294. ic Status Table 79 System Monitor gt VoIP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted Status This field displays the current state of the phone call Idle There are no current VoIP calls incoming calls or outgoing calls being made Dial The callee s phone is ringing Ring The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call Process There is a VoIP call in progress DI SC The callee s line is busy the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port Phone Status Account This field displays the phone accounts of the Device Outgoing This field displays the SIP number that you use to make calls on this phone port Number Incoming This field displays the SIP number that you use to receive calls on this phone port Number Phone State This field shows whether or the phone connected to the subscriber port is on hook ONHOOK or off hook OFFHOOK P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide User Account 19 1 Overview You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen 19 2 The User Account Screen Use the User Account screen to configure system passwo
295. ication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 Most Secure Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x RADIUS In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are User based identification that allows for roaming Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LA
296. ication Protocol Provides wi By Fast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Ss FLEXnet Licensing Service This servic m T i Description Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 This is DHCP v6 client C Program Files DHCPv6Client_dibbler dibbler client exe service d C NPr ie You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service Windows 7 Status Started Started Started Started Started Startup Type Automatic oma Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Manual Manual Log On As Local System oca em Local System Local System Network S Network 5 Local System Local System Local System Local System Local System Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable Pv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide 371 372 Appendix F IPv6 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection Select the I nternet Protocol Version 6 TCP I Pv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change c e Tq lui Local Area Connection Properties xm Networkin g Connect using amp Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items v 0 Client for Microsoft Networks M IE QoS Packet Scheduler Install ninsta Properti
297. iceType PPP over Ethemet PPPoE v IPv6 IPv4 DualStack Enable i DNS Server Obtain DNS info Automatically VLAN amp Use the following Static DNS IP Address Enable VLAN m Primary DNS Server A Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 1 Secondary DNS Server C 1 Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID 1 4094 3900 3905 are reserved IPv6 Address PPP Infomation C Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically PPPUserName Enable Prefix Delegation n PPPPassword Static IPv6 Address PPPoEServiceName L J IPv6 Address Authentication Method ato Prefix length ps Use Static IP Address Iv IPv6 Default Gateway IP Address pooo C 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Primary IPv6 DNS Server Secondary IPv6 DNS Server Apply Back Figure 18 6to4 Tunneling 9 Bto4 Tunneling 6RD Enable Oo 6to4 Tunneling Relay Server IP 192 88 22 33 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the fields in this screen EtherWAN Table 7 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE VDSL LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select VDSL or EtherWAN as the interface that you want to configure VDSL The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port EtherWAN The Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Select th
298. ices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 139 Chapter 6 Wireless 6 7 2 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 6 7 2 3 on page 139 for information about this Table 27 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The oth
299. ices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 357 Appendix D Wireless LANs When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enr
300. icon displays in Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 69 Internet Connection Status Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP address of the Device first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device Follow the steps below to access the web configurator Click Start and then Control Panel Double click Network Connections P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Figure 70 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back F P Search Ts Folders E e Network Connections Network Tasks gt Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection Create a new connection f Set up a home or small office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also Local Area Connection J Network Troubleshooter Enabled e E A Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places Control Panel My Network Places 4 My Documents E My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder a starn Ss Network Connections 4 An icon
301. ide Chapter 7 Home Networking The following figure is an overview of the Device s file server feature Computers A and B can access files on a USB device C which is connected to the Device Figure 52 File Sharing Overview gt The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup In this case contact your network administrator C S 7 5 1 Before You Begin Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on 1 Connect the USB device to one of the Device s USB ports Make sure the Device is connected to your network 2 The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on Note If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device see the troubleshooting for suggestions Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing Figure 53 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing Server Configuration File Sharing Services SMB Enable C Disable Share Directory List Add new share Status Share Name Share Path Share Description od P USB_Storage GENERIC_USB USB_Storage a T B ay P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide
302. iends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click this to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 15 Certificates P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide VoIP 16 1 Overview Use this chapter to Connect an analog phone to the Device Make phone calls over the Internet as well as the regular phone network Configure settings such as speed dial Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls 16 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line and to set up the phones you connect to the Device Use the SIP Service Provider screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for Vol P calls the numbers for certain phone functions Section 16 3 on page 224 Use the SI P Account screen to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the Device use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device Section 16 3 on page 224 Use the Common screen to configure RFC3262 support on the Device Section 16 5 on page 228 Use the Phone Device screen to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to
303. ies to this class You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already Criteria Configuration Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification Basic From Interface Select whether the traffic class comes from the LAN or a wireless interface Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select I P you also need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select 8021Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section Source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter 0 for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask Port Range If you select TCP
304. iew This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Device 24 2 The Firmware Upgrade Screen Click Maintenance Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to three minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress Figure 126 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Upgrade Firmware Current Firmware Version V3 10 TUJ 0 b4 FilePath _Browse The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is the present Firmware version Firmware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin the upload process This process may take up to three minutes P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Firmware Upgrade After you see the firmware updating screen wait a few
305. ificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked Certificate Directory Servers Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL Certificate Revocation List The Device can check a peer s certificate against a directory server s list of revoked certificates The framework of servers software procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI public key infrastructure Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits The Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust no matter how many devices you need to authenticate Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys Certificate File Formats The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats Binary X 509 This is an ITU T recommendation that defines the formats for X 509 certificates PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X 509 certificate into a printable form Binary PKCS 7 This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data including digital signatures that may be encrypted The Device currently allows the import
306. iles Note Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares No user name and password or other form of security is used The media server is enabled by default with the video photo and music shares published To change your Device s media server settings click Network Setting Home Networking Media Server The screen appears as shown Figure 55 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Media Server M Enable Media Server noo The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 34 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Media Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Media Check this to have the Device function as a DLNA compliant media server Server Enable the media server to let DLNA compliant media clients on your network play media files located in the shares Apply Click Apply to save your changes P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 7 The Printer Server Screen The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP IP port on the computers connected to your network Figure 56 Sharing a USB Printer 7 7 1 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network The USB printer must be connected
307. ilt in Switch Four auto negotiating MDI MDI X Gigabit Ethernet ports DSL Port P 2812HNU L F1 One RJ11 6p2c over POTS Annex A Yellow P 2812HNU L F3 One RJ45 8p6c over ISDN Annex B WAN Port One RJ 45 8p8c auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000Base Tx Blue PHONE Ports Two FXS POTS ports RJ 11 4p2c FXO port L models only One FXO Foreign Exchange Office lifeline port RESET Button To restore factory defaults hold for more than 5 seconds To restart reboot the system hold for more than 2 seconds WLAN WPS Button Press and hold for 5 seconds Turn WPS on or off Press for 1 second Turn WLAN on or off USB Port Two USB v2 0 ports for file sharing printer server and 3G WAN backup Antenna Two 2 dBi internal antennas Operation Temperature 02 C 409 C Storage Temperature 252 609 C Operation Humidity 2096 8596 RH Storage Humidity 2096 9096 RH mounting Distance between the 132 3 mm centers of the holes for wall mounting on the device s back Screw size for wall M4 tap P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Firmware Specifications Table 90 Firmware Specifications Default IP Address http 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default User Name admin Default Password 1234 DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address http 192 168 1
308. ime Time Setting Use this screen to change your Device s time and date Log Setting Log Setting Use this screen to select which logs and or immediate alerts your device is to record You can also set it to e mail the logs to you Firmware Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device Upgrade Upgrade Backup Backup Restore Use this screen to backup and restore your device s Restore configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Reboot Reboot Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off Diagnostic Ping TraceRoute Use this screen to test the connections to other devices DSL Line Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Tutorials 3 1 Overview This chapter contains the following tutorials Setting Up Your DSL Connection How to Set up a Wireless Network Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding How to Make a VoIP Call Using the File Sharing Feature Using the Media Server Feature Using the Print Server Feature Configuring the MAC Address Filter Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup Access the Device Using DDNS 3 2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the web configurator If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection use the information from your Internet
309. in the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 147 Chapter 6 Wireless When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP LE P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 7 Home Networking 7 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to whic
310. ince casansdintaantesdiencomeictdundnegastecnade 123 6 1 2 Wireless ECE IVE 2 uu cexceicade pidas anian ue dus aera p dU E YE Ran d 123 Bd EDO ODIO per rr ee eer eee reer Pete ie rd dd ese plain bote Qi ene rer a rrr 125 6 2 Ihe Wireless General SCTE assists atid week eb caida D axe ee ad t E eR intra ed DERE 125 Sem ee D T I TU A remecrrtTs 127 6 2 2 Basic Static WEP Shared WEP Enry DUON iuis ccsctdasccenteersetsctessasecomtcasiaadengiccedes 127 5 2 3 More Secure WPA PSK auicssgnaseccitieteci aqaa oci no a ERR Ea E d 129 Be al PAT a Ua I RT E E dee ie Dama o oes 130 Co WS US AP OEE cieie a E ia E a EOE 131 Gat Edi NOG AF Suisse peo a a a A AEAN 132 B mho VEO DONIS cccciscevarpinnncicacexwnssadogaeeopaasncanbeidaadeeees DU pEFEePe Y OBERE ETSI GR E ep iE B bebe iU Fee 133 65 Tho WMM GOON arcmin OG FRE POP CPC EO CRECEN CLP EIFE EDO GEI Feb NaN Nee VE FUE S 135 erc Fuse MN m 137 6 7 Technical ReRrentO 137 7 1 PCM Nirale TOME sions mons es teni pend n 138 8 7 2 Wireless SECU COS I Sm T 138 NWACKCI Cd a cnke ttasasneepiyste tuabeprdevnsadenaiucheeestens 140 Ur rol e Tcr ec T 141 ES MBSSIE cosctetur piede besqUdesi stude QN reputds pate ree vercurer tern 141 5 7 8 WIF Protected SEU TURPIS siesta denne cadena et d a dieu aa p NEMPE ER RA Ig 142 Chapter 7 Home NeDWOIEIH sep nde sapeva AP bk etin EE IRa FE Van LOU a E 149 A ooo ev 149 Talt Whal You Can Do in iS CODD eietcosc iu Precio recc osea Poe eR Eccc Ese Pete de Reese re dude 149 ER S uA
311. ine the other is on hold press the flash key and press 2 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 17 Logs 17 1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator as e mail or to a syslog server 17 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select Section 17 2 on page 244 Use the Phone Log screen to view phone logs and alert messages Section 17 3 on page 245 Use The VoIP Call History screen to view the details of the calls performed on the Device Section 17 4 on page 245 17 1 2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The
312. information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 128 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the Device The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device The key is not sent over the network more hide more Click more to show more fields in this section Click hide more to hide them WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously Group Key Update The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a Timer new group key out to all clients If the value is set to 0 the update timer function is disabled Encryption If the security mode is WPA the encryption mode is set to TKIP to enable Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP security on your wireless network If the security mode is WPA2 the encryption mode is set to AES to enable Advanced Encryption System AES security on your wireless network AES provides superior security to TKIP 6 3 The More AP Screen The Device can broadcast up to four wireless network names at the same time This means that users can connect to the Device using different SSIDs You can secure the connection on each SSID profile so that wireless clients connecting to the Device using different SSIDs cannot communicate with each other This screen allows you to enable and config
313. ing table describes the fields in this screen Table 77 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt NAT LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Device Name This shows the name of the client IP Address This shows the IP address of the client MAC Address This shows the MAC address of the client No of Open This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client Session P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Traffic Status 18 5 The 3G Backup Status Screen Click System Monitor Traffic Status 3G Backup to open the following screen You can view the 3G connection traffic statistics in this screen Figure 119 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt 3G Backup Sent hf Received 0 Bytes 0 Bytes Status Refreshinterval 5 seconds Packets Sent Packets Received Connected Interface Data Error Drop Data Error Drop ppp9 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 78 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt 3G backup LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the 3G interface of the Device Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Connected This shows the name of the 3G connection interface that is currently connected Interface
314. ings on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to a power outlet Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do n
315. ion Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the Device 802 11 Mode This is the 802 11 mode used Only compliant WLAN devices can associate with the Device SSID This is the name of the wireless network Security This is the type of wireless security employed by the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes 6 5 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable or disable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM wireless networks for multimedia applications P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting Wireless WMM The following screen displays Figure 40 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM WMM WiFi MultiMedia IV Enable WMM of SSID1 IV Enable WMM of SSID2 IV Enable WMM of SSID3 IV Enable WMM of SSID4 Enable WMM Automatic Power Save Delivery APSD Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WMM LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable WMM of This enables the Device to automatically give a service a priority level according SSID1 4 to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Enable WMM Click this to increase battery life for battery powered wireless clients APSD uses Automatic Power
316. ion example 384 WPA2 382 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index user authentication 384 vs WPA2 PSK 383 wireless client supplicant 384 with RADIUS application example 384 WPA2 Pre Shared Key see WPA2 PSK WPA2 PSK 382 383 application example 385 WPA PSK 141 383 application example 385 WPS 143 145 example 147 limitations 148 PIN 144 example 145 push button 143 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide
317. ion of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date 402 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices C You must license the entire work as a
318. is example Protocol Select TCP UDP This should be the protocol supported by the Doom server Service Name User Defined WAN Interface MyDSLConnection Start Port p66 End Port 566 Translation Start Port pes Translation End Port poo Server IP Address 92468134 Protocol TCP UDP y EXE 3 Click Apply 4 The port forwarding settings you configured should appear in the table Make sure the bulb in Status is the color yellow meaning it is activated Click Apply to have the Device start forwarding port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192 168 1 34 Add new rule User 4 RRR RRR RRR RRR R P gt Ter 1 2 Defined MyDSLConn 666 666 666 666 192 168 1 34 TCP UDP 4 i Players on the Internet then can have access to your Doom server 3 5 How to Make a VoIP Call You can register a SIP account with the SIP server and make voice calls over the Internet to another VolP device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials The following parameters are used in this example SI P Service Provider Name ServiceProvider1 SIP Server Address sip example com REGI STER Server Address registersip example com SIP Service Domain sip example com SI P Account Number 12345678 Username ChangeMe Password Thisl sMySIP 3 5 1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account To use a registered SIP account you
319. is if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account WAN Service Type This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access IP over Ethernet In this type of Internet connection IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment IPv6 IPv4 Select Enable to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time If DualStack this function is disabled the Device only runs IPv4 VLAN This section is available only when you select VDSL or EtherWAN in the Type field Enable VLAN Select this to add the VLAN tag specified below to the outgoing traffic through this connection Enter 802 1P IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a Priority MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1p priority level from 0 to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the n
320. is ADSL and the connection has the following information General Name MyDSLConnection Type ADSL Mode Routing WAN Service Type PPPoE ATM PVC Configuration VPI VCI 36 48 Encapsulation LLC SNAP Bridging Mode Service Category UBR without PCR PPP I nformation PPP User Name 1234 DSL Ex com PPP Password ABCDEF PPPoE Service My DSL Name Authentication Auto Method Static IP Address 192 168 1 32 Others PPPoE Passthrough Disabled NAT Enabled IGMP Multicast Proxy Enabled Apply as Default Gateway Enable DNS Server Static DNS IP Address Primary 192 168 1 254 Secondary 192 168 1 253 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Enter or select these values and click Apply General Name Type Mode WANServiceType PPPoE Passthrough IPv6 IPv4 DualStack ATM PVC Configuration VPI 0 255 VCI 32 65535 DSL Link Type Encapsulation Mode Service Category PPP Infomation PPPUserName PPPPassword PPPoEServiceName Authentication Method Use Static IP Address IP Address Routing Feature NAT Enable IGMP Proxy Enable Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server Obtain DNS info Automatically Use the following Static DNS IP Address MyDSLConnection ADSL gt Routing PPP over Ethernet PPPoE v r Disable B j il EoA jm LLCISNAP BRIDGI
321. istrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 277 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27 5 Wireless Internet Access What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection How can solve this problem The following factors may cause interference Obstacles walls ceilings furniture and so on Building Materials metal doors aluminum studs Electrical devices microwaves monitors electric motors cordless phones and other wireless devices To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection you can Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles such as walls and ceilings between the AP and the wireless client Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously or add additional APs if necessary Try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information it may have too many programs open that use the Inte
322. ith a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combinatio
323. k has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadc
324. l Duration This field displays how long the call lasted P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Traffic Status 18 1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN LAN interfaces and NAT 18 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics Section 18 2 on page 247 Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics Section 18 3 on page 248 Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the Device s client s Section 18 4 on page 249 Use the 3G Backup screen to view the 3G connection traffic statistics Section 18 6 on page 251 Use the Vol P Status screen to view the VoIP traffic statistics Section 18 6 on page 251 18 2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status to open the WAN screen You can view the WAN traffic statistics in this screen Figure 116 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN Status Sent ai Received 3062046 Bytes 17295076 Bytes Refresh interval 6 seconds iv Packets Sent n Connected Interface Data Error Drop Data Error Drop eth1 12474 0 a 290328 0 30 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 247 Chapter 18 Traffic Status The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 75 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This shows the number of bytes received and
325. l Center Network Card 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate vasr26linux h2oz Network Card Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Additionally edit their configuration Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired amp Network Settings connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button Figure 185 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Name IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth eth0 Started automatically at boot IP address assigned using DHCP elete ko Abort P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 186 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup YasST2 linux h20z lt Address Setup Select No Address Setup if you do not want any IP address for this device This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices Select Dynamic address if you do not have a static IP address assigned by the system administrator or your cable o
326. ld which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker 9 2 The QoS General Screen 178 Use this screen to enable or disable QoS set the bandwidth and select to have the Device automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length Click Network Setting gt QoS to open the General screen Figure 76 Network Setting gt QoS gt General M Active QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth kbps Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None B Note You can assign the upstream bandwidth manually Ifthe field is empty the CPE setthe value automatically If Enable QoS checkbox is selected choose an automapping type to assign traffic priority automatically P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Network Setting gt QoS gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance You can
327. le only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Device Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the Device print server Table 36 Compatible USB Printers BRAND MODEL Brother MFC7420 CANON BJ F9000 CANON i320 CANON PIXMA MP450
328. lick Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to exit this screen without saving 7 4 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See page 164 for more information on UPnP Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP gt UPnP to display the screen shown next Figure 51 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt UPnP UPnP State UPnP Enable Disable Aw The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Network Settings gt Home Networking gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION UPnP Select Enable to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the Device s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Apply Click Apply to save your changes 7 5 The File Sharing Screen You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on your network P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Gu
329. ll consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix H Legal Information Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index A AAL5 312 ACK message 250 activation media server 162 SSID 132 wireless LAN scheduling 137 adding a printer example 66 administrator password 30 ADSL2 312 Advanced Encryption Standard see AES AES 383 ALG 316 alternative subnet mask notation 324 antenna 309 directional 388 gain 387 omni directional 388 AP Acc
330. ll on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to a telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Take one of the following actions Reject the second call Press the flash key and then press 0 Disconnect the first call and answer the second call Either press the flash key and press 1 or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings Put the first call on hold and answer the second call Press the flash key and then 2 European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer a call that you have answered to another phone number 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold 2 When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call to operate the Intercom 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone European Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone press the flash key to put the call on hold and get a dial tone 2 Diala phone number directly to make another call P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP 3 When the second call is answered press the flash key and press 3 to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 Ifyou want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections one is on l
331. lmLtD GHjtntb31jANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUFADA RMwEQYKCZImiZPyLGOBGRYDY29tMRUwEwYKCZImiZPyLGQBGRYFWnIYRUwxEDAO gNVBAMTB1p5WEVMQOEwHhcNMDcwMjA1MDMwMTIOWhcNMTCWMjA1MDMwOTQS5WjA IRMwEQYKCZImiZPyLGQBGRYDY29tMRUwEwYKCZImiZPyL GQBGRYFWnIYRUwxEDAO gNVBAMTB1pS5WEVMQOEwggEIMAO0GCSqGSIb3DQOEBAQUAAA4IBDwAwggEKAOIBAQDS igNOfPU E DaV XWGN4prKCY3eHpT8z5X18rICBOxQF GH8OT7kptXQlcvkrJP gss u1qBMf2 NsrTuzoyJ70iiQQ60RKIBGVFXSE6sRruLBUuKAHDTX3xtWyhySxxb2U SiTGp8B8sbXNOZKWYIREIJTBEXois iKTflSpnZRTVxT7OQMAQIUeqP 11Yayv4yx aBPZSdGrz9VOKOVAryR11fjSKANfzZdOLn3BuHtqsO3pSH3029zogmcR9UfBU3q aDeWS8T2P1sjYiyP 1jm 4r32Q0qVHq9a37ErqCUjL 1kSCatnx4Aq63Xg4 C 1 SkCkN 9p UYsCBgKDgjvJBkPIAgMBAAGjggFhMIIBXTATBgakrBgEEAYI3FAIEBhAEAEMA QaTALBgNVHQ8EBAMCAUYwDwYDVR TAQH BAUwAWEB ZAdBgNVHQAEF gQUZvbvYHJ IMCBN3Dw3QxUXkatg2QwgfY GA1UdHwSB7jCB6zCB6KCB5aCB40aBrWxkYXABLy8v zi B The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate You may use any character not including spaces Certificate Detail This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to fr
332. lready has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 209 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 o AP1 ENROLLEE exe udi oF wo CLIENT 2 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 210 WPS Example Network Step 3 EXISTING CONNECTION 6 CLIENT 1 AP1 REGISTRAR a p RZS CLIENT 2 S Scu m ENROLLEE k Npa a AP1 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS dev
333. milar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide EN Chapter 5 Broadband compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix 3G Comparison Table See the following table for a comparison between 2G 2 5G 2 75G and 3G wireless technologies Table 15 2G 2 5G 2 75G 3G and 3 5G Wireless Technologies MOBILE PHONE AND DATA STANDARDS DATA NAME TYPE SPEED GSM BASED CDMA BASED 2G Circuit GSM Global System for Mobile Interim Standard 95 IS 95 the first Slow switched Communications Personal Handy CDMA based digital cellular standard phone System PHS etc pioneered by Qualcomm The brand A name for IS 95 is cdmaOne IS 95 is also known as TIA EIA 95 2 5G Packet GPRS General Packet Radio CDMA2000 is a hybrid 2 5G 3G switched Services High Speed Circuit protocol of mobile telecommunications Switched Data HSCSD etc standards that use CDMA a multiple 2 75G Packet Enhanced Data rates for GSM access Scheme fordigitaltadio switched Evolution EDGE Enhanced GPRS CDMA2000 1xRTT 1 times Radio EGPRS etc Transmission Technology is the core CDMA2000 wireless air interface standa
334. minutes before logging into the Device again Figure 127 Firmware Uploading vee Router is restarting now Please wait As there will be no indic the pr or one mint empting to router again The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 128 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful an error screen will appear Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen Figure 129 Error Message Software Upload Error e The uploaded file was not accepted by the router Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Backup Restore 25 1 Overview The Backup Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default 25 2 The Backup Restore Screen Click Maintenance gt Backup Restore Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 130 Maintenance gt Backup Restore Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Re
335. mputer that is connected to a ETHERNET port can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Device 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device Log out of the Device in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out 3 Turn the Device off and on 4 f this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 27 2 on page 273 cannot Telnet to the Device See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 275 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27 4 Internet Access cannot access the Internet Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 24 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on
336. ms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on th
337. n 3 If the VoIP settings are correct use speed dial to make peer to peer calls If you can make a call using speed dial there may be something wrong with the SIP server contact your VoIP service provider 27 7 USB Device Connection The Device fails to detect my USB device 1 Disconnect the USB device 2 Reboot the Device 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on 4 Re connect your USB device to the Device 27 8 UPnP When using UPnP and the Device reboots my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places Local Network 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device s LAN port or from your computer P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 279 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 2 Re connect the Ethernet cable The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen Restart your computer cannot open special applications such as white board file transfer and video when use the MSN messenger Q1 Wait more than three minutes 2 Restart the applications P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Device s hardware and firmware features Hardware Specifications Table 89 Hardware Specifications Dimensions 224 W x 168 5 D x 77 5 H mm Power Specification 12V at 2 0A DC Bu
338. n the Device uses an ISP s IPv6 address prefix instead of the 2002 48 prefix The operational domain of 6RD is limited to and controlled by the ISP s network 6RD hosts are ensured to be reachable from all native IPv6 addresses as 6RD only uses relay servers within control of the ISP This option is not available if your WAN Service Type is PPPoE 6to4 Tunneling Relay Server IP Enter the tunneling relay server s IPv4 address in this field If your WAN Service Type is PPPoE you need to enter this field in order to use 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Select whether you want to obtain the IPv6 DNS server addresses automatically or configure them manually Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary IPv6 Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Secondary IPv6 Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 2 1 3 Routing PPPoE ADSL Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want
339. n copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 377 Appendix G Open Software Announcements 378 Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties NOTE Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy modify and redistrib
340. n existing rule Blocked Site URL Keyword Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device blocks access Click Delete to remove it Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the Device Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Parental Control P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Certificates 15 1 Overview The Device can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication 15 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Local Certificates screen to view and import the Device s CA signed certificates Section 15 2 on page 213 Use the Trusted CA screen to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device You can also export the certificates to a computer Section 15 3 on page 215 15 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter Certification Authorities A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities
341. n full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For
342. n of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU ope
343. n page 187 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 179 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 9 3 The Queue Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment Click Network Setting QoS Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Figure 77 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Add new Queue 1 WAN_Default_Queue WAN 4 1 DT 5 Tj 2 LAN Default Queue LAN 4 1 DT ZW 3 Fast WAN 7 3 DT 2 W 4 Active user WAN 5 3 DT 4 5 Passive user WAN 3 3 DT 40 6 Slow WAN 1 3 DT 40 B note Maximum 8 user configurable entries The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new Click this to create a new entry Queue This is the index number of this entry Status This indicates whether the queue is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue Interface This shows the name of the Device s interface through which traffic in this queue passes Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used by the Device
344. n sent outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected ATM This is available only when your WAN mode is ADSL Loopback Test Click this button to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs VCIs before you begin this test The Device sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the Device The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network 270 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Diagnostic Table 88 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line continued ITEM DESCRIPTION DSL Line Click this button to view statistics about the DSL connections Status 1 noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection coming into the Device from the ISP It is measured in decibels The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is 2 output power upstream is the amount of power in decibels that the Device is using to transmit to the ISP 3 attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude in decibels of the DSL signal coming into the Device from the ISP Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into sub carriers sub channels of 4 3125 KHz each called tones The rest of the display is the line s bit allocation This is displayed as the number in hexadecimal format o
345. n which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 9 4 1 Add Edit QoS Class Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to an existing classifier to configure it Figure 80 Class Setup Add Edit Class Configuration Active iv Class Name Classification Order as eg Forward To Interface Uncnangeg DSCP Mark Unchange 802 1P Mark Unchange z To Queue Fat Criteria Configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Basic I From Interface Local I Ether Type fir 0x0800 Source MAC Address 1 MAC Mask SC t S m Exclude 7 IP Address IPSubnetMask a Exclude Port Range q 85535 m Exclude Destination MAC Address MAC Mask EEENENEEEEEEN n Exclude IP Address CL IPSubnetMask c Exclude Port Range q 65535 r Exclude Others 802 1P 0 BE r Exclude I IP Protocol TCP if r Exclude IP Packet Length l Aoo 46 1504 ni Exclude DscP r Exclude T TCP ACK E Exclude DHCP endorClassID DHCP Option 60 r Exclude Class ID String
346. nced technical information on SIP 9 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable QoS set the bandwidth and allow the Device to automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length Section 9 2 on page 178 Use the Queue Setup screen to configure QoS queue assignment Section 9 3 on page 180 Use the Class Setup screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow Section 9 4 on page 181 Use the Monitor screen to view the Device s QoS related packet statistics Section 9 5 on page 186 9 1 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 177 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS fie
347. ncoming calls there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls If you do not select a source for incoming calls you cannot receive any calls on this phone port SIP Number This shows the SIP account number P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 65 Phone Device Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION FXO Interface to Receive Incoming Call Enable Select this if you want to receive phone calls from the PSTN line that do not use the Internet on this phone port Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving 16 7 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the Device is in To access this screen click Vol P gt Phone gt Region Figure 106 VoIP gt Phone gt Region Region Settings USA m Call Service Mode Europe Type B Note Caution When Region Settings is changed you need to reboot device to take settings effect Each field is described in the following table Table 66 VolP gt Phone gt Region LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Settings Select the place in which the Device is located Call Service Mode Select the mode for supplementary phone services call hold call waiting call transfer and three way conference calls that your VoIP service provider supports Europe Type use su
348. nder can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 30 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PCR zzi SCR lt gt lt gt Time MBS MBS ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections
349. ne To access this screen click Add new SIP Account in the SIP Account screen or Edit icon next to an existing account Figure 102 SIP Account Add Edit Service Provider Selection General SIP Account SIP Account Number Authenticaton Username Password URL Type URL Type Voice Features Primary Compression Type Second Compression Type Third Compression Type Speaking Volume Control Listening Volume Control B note Call Features IV Send Caller ID M Active Call Transfer Iv Active Call Waiting Active Busy Forward No Answer Ring Time SIP Service Provider Selection Active G 168 Echo Cancellation Iv Active VAD Voice Active Detector VAD will not be active while G 722 is used Active Call Waiting Reject Time pa 10 60 second Active Unconditional Forward To Number Active No Answer Forward ChangeMe 7 Active SIP Account cn angeMe ChangeMe mm SIP G7 muraw s eva E uade I To Number To Number 10 10 180 Second Apply Back Each field is described in the following table Table 62 SIP Account Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP account you configure in this screen This field is view only if you are editing the SIP account SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection Thi
350. ne backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 375 Appendix G Open Software Announcements 376 The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law trade secret law international treaty provisions and the applicable national laws of each respective country All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation 4 Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security o
351. net 25 using FTP See FTP Maximum Burst Size MBS MBSSID 142 Media access control 217 Media Access Control see MAC Address media server 161 activation 162 iTunes server 161 100 105 109 114 Message Integrity Check see MIC MIC 383 model name 89 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 116 multicast 117 multimedia 245 Multiple BSS see MBSSID multiple PVC support 311 multiple SIP accounts 315 multiple voice channels 315 multiplexing 114 LLC based 114 VC based 114 multiprotocol encapsulation 113 N NAT 165 203 329 definitions 206 how it works 207 what it does 207 Network Address Translation see NAT network map 33 non proxy calls 243 O OAM 312 OK response 250 operation humidity 309 operation temperature 309 P Pairwise Master Key PMK 383 385 park 314 passphrase 127 passwords 30 PBC 143 Peak Cell Rate PCR 100 105 108 114 peer to peer calls 243 Per Hop Behavior see PHB PHB 199 252 phone book speed dial 243 phone config 314 pickup 314 PIN WPS 144 example 145 point to point calls 316 ports 26 power adaptor 317 power specifications 309 PPP Point to Point Protocol Link Layer Protocol 313 PPP over ATM AAL5 312 PPP over Ethernet 312 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index PPP over Ethernet see PPPoE PPPoE 95 113 311 Benefits 113 preamble 138 preamble mode 377 print server 24 Printer Server 163 printer sharing and LAN 163 configuration 61 requiremen
352. nfigurator Status page Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the Device later 3 12 2 Configuring DDNS on Your Device Configure the following settings in the Network Setting gt Dynamic DNS screen Select Active Dynamic DNS Select Dynamic DNS for the DDNS type Type zyxelrouter dyndns org in the Host Name field Enter the user name UserName1 and password 12345 Dynamic DNS Configuration M Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS Host Name Eyxeirouter dyndns org 1to 255 characters User Name UserName1 1to 255 characters Password eeccc 1to 63 characters Me Cancel Click Apply 3 12 3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the Device from the Internet To test this 1 Open a web browser on the computer using the IP address a b c d that is connected to the Internet 2 Type http zyxelrouter dyndns org and press Enter 3 The Device s login page should appear You can then log into the Device and manage it P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference The appendices provide general information Some details may not apply to your NWA Connection Status and System Info 4 1 Overview After you log into the web configurator the Connection Status screen appears This shows the network
353. nfo Automatically VPI 0 255 R Use the following Static DNS IP Address VCI 32 85535 p o Primary DNS Server DSL Link Type PPPoA i Secondary DNS Server Encapsulation Mode LLC SNAP BRIDGING IPv6 Address Service Category Non Realtime VBR Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically Peak Cell Rate cells s Enable Prefix Delegation m Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Static IPv6 Address i lis Maximum Burst Size cells IPV6 Address m Prefix length 64 PPP Infomation IPv6 Default Gateway PPPUserName 6to4 Tunneling PPPPassword IPv6 DNS Server Authentication Method Auto xi Use Static IP Address F Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically c IP Address pooo Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Primary IPv6 DNS Server Secondary IPv6 DNS Server EE Figure 24 6to4 Tunneling 9 Bto4 Tunneling 6RD Enable o Bto4 Tunneling Relay Server IP 192 88 22 33 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoA ADSL LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select an interface for which you want to configure here ADSL The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port EtherWAN The Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already Mode Select Routing default from th
354. ng and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured Manually connect to a network Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point AP which is configured for WPA PSK security and connected to the Internet Before you connect to the access point you must know its Service Set IDentity SSID and WPA PSK pre shared key In this example the SSID is SSID Example3 and the pre shared key is 12MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next Available Networ Site Information 1 ssp channel Signal 4 Network Type infrastructure T cs ZyXEL MIS 6 62 Network Mode 802 119 T c ZyXEL YZU 6 62 Channel 6 T ZyXEL test 6 60 Security WPA PSK 8 Ld 55ID Example3 6 56 MAC Address 00 A0 C5 CD 1F 64 A Surveyed at 11 46 38 T CPE 5257 00 11 54 T dlink4300 6 50 xj Scan Connect P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks Click Scan if you want to search again If no
355. ng is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 191 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet mH zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable L information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 192 Internet Options Privacy Internet
356. ng to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 142 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example a amp AN ENS 192 168 1 3
357. nly All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See Section 7 9 on page 164 for examples of installing and using UPnP P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 7 1 2 3 About File Sharing Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network Shares When settings are set to default each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder called a share If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition then each partition will be allocated a share You can also configure a share to be a sub folder or file on the USB device File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems The file sharing feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table FAT and FAT32 Common Internet File System The Device uses Common Internet File System CIFS protocol for its file sharing functions C
358. ns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS 11 2 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device To change your Device s DDNS click Network Setting DNS The screen appears as shown Figure 87 Network Setting gt DNS Dynamic DNS Configuration Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG x Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS Host Name a to 255 characters User Name a to 255 characters Password a to 63 characters Amy Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 197 Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 50 Network Setting gt DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Configuration Active Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS Type service provider Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settin
359. nse they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of t
360. nternet For example if IRC is blocked are there users that require this service Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific For example if IRC is blocked for all users will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability For example if FTP ports TCP 20 21 are allowed from the Internet to the LAN Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers Does this rule conflict with any existing rules P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Firewall Once these questions have been answered adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Firewall P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide MAC Filter 13 1 Overview This chapter discusses MAC address filtering You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the MAC Filter screen This applies to wired and wireless connections 13 1 1 What You Need to Know Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen 13 2 The MAC Filter Screen
361. o ERcRd Ue ARI SERE E 211 15 0 3 venind a Co BI BIG cano ion asttrd uot epo basi RD aire Sato tu e RUE ed nc o 212 Rte ES aeS IEEE ETT 213 9 3 MELI OON asco ee prada aa boc qi dd pert S Ea ttr jua a latos c boda npe es 215 4155 DOUG CA MIDO gubbssrb tions cece didi a ida d datnr cs hd bue Dru aaa 215 RR SE 0o S I E UU ME 216 Chapter 16 VOIP RT ee eer te EE DHL EVERETT KEEROHA UR LUDERE EDU ERA GE HELENA EID GO ERICH A D LE LR E E EAE errr EI 219 LONE DIL RENTE NIU IE RON SUMERET 219 18 1 1 What You Gan De In This CHSETBE iscoc coU Pee teda pepe la dab breue QUU a P bet dida teet did deb nkV pude 219 18 1 2 What You Need fo KNOW uec esca ecd esa pa EYES ERR RON E aad Pad UE Ra VR FER ERU T I ad 219 TOU S BETIS aU cocti Laut oo od a ot aqu eleva dea Eat a Ioa od aO EUIS 221 16 2 The SIP Service Provider GOBEN ausccccecuie essc Hic piss paicccN E Op cta ERE ECIS EEE 221 169 The SIP Aoeount OOIBBIY ciioer traer ad ei d rea Ps REX br ra dene b p at aas 224 pcm icai TS t t LU 226 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 155 Milliple SIP JODIE os ro proba da ada bct ob aa pour aqoa eta e d obra Lp 228 To The Common ONE cnius ceni iit Exe ni So Deees dana Eben Er Ct aA DUM Eton d actas ura Fra nt x RA 228 Moro zeit Re 229 18 5 1 Edit Phong Davie oic HAE C IRE Rd a s be p HO d Re b e e ER eae Ree 230 16 the Pome Fegan SOOO acsi o dte epe aeo UE eer D ORDRE PEU de Beta ancwudaaet cece issus od ORE LEV d dae 231 Tou T
362. o have the phone connected to the first phone port receive phone calls for the SIP 3 account 4 Click Apply to save your changes SIP Account to Make Outgoing Call P Accou N SP1 12345678 SP2 ChangeMe Iv SIP 1 12345678 F siP2 ChangeMe FXO Interface to Receive Incoming Call M Enable Apply 3 5 1 4 Making a VoIP Call 1 Make sure you connect a telephone to the first phone port on the Device 2 Make sure the Device is on and connected to the Internet 3 Pick up the phone receiver 4 Dial the VolP phone number you want to call 3 6 Using the File Sharing Feature In this section you can Set up file sharing of your USB device from the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Access the shared files of your USB device from a computer 3 6 1 Set Up File Sharing To set up file sharing you need to connect your USB device enable file sharing and set up your share s 3 6 1 1 Activate File Sharing 1 Connect your USB device to one of the USB ports at the back panel of the Device 2 Click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt File Sharing Select Enable and click Apply to activate the file sharing function The Device automatically adds your USB device to the Share Directory List Server Configuration File Sharing Services SMB Enable C Disable Share Directory List Add new share USB Storage GENERIC USB Mass Storage 10
363. o step 6 to continue If the Print Center icon is not in the Macintosh Dock proceed to the next step On your desktop double click the Macintosh HD icon to open the Macintosh HD window Macintosh HD Double click the Applications folder eooQ0 E Macintosh HD s fee E ESO G D pw gt WV A Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 12 items 19 31 GB available Applications Applications Mac OS 9 Users Documents Library System P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Double click the Utilities folder e e Applications m e E 48 M e f om E i w Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 39 items 19 31 GB available k Address Book Calculator a i cs Chess Clock DVD Player 5 Double click the Print Center icon eoo0 L Utilities 7 e 3 m m 45 s cm gt 0 Y Back Forward View Computer Home Favorites Applications 30 items 19 31 CB available n B Keychain Access Netinfo Manager Network Utility ODBC Administrator Process Viewer 6 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen e808 Printer List ce Name Wi Status Stylus C43 Stopped 7 Setup your printer in the Printer List configuration screen Select IP Printing from the drop down list box 8 Inthe Printer s Address field type the IP address of your Device 9 Deselect the Use default queue on
364. odied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the obje
365. ollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP 358 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFI NED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 109 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTIO
366. omains 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 321 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System Administration Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Tool Edit Help Devices Ping Netstat Traceroute Port Scan Lookup Finger Whois Network device FK Configure IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPv4 10 0 2 15 255 255 255 0 I0 0 2 255 IPv6 fe80 a00 27ff fe30 el6c 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e1 6c sremitied sytes 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors 0 Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KiB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation
367. omatically tries to re register your SIP account when one half of this time has passed The SIP register server might have a different expiration Register Re send Enter the number of seconds the Device waits before it tries again to register the timer SIP account if the first try failed or if there is no response Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the Device lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session Min SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the Device lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions This field is the shortest expiration time that the Device accepts Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Enter the number of seconds the Device should wait after you stop dialing Selection numbers before it makes the phone call The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers PSTN Fail Over Select this check box if you want to redirect the outgoing calls to the PSTN line L models only that do not use the Internet when your SIP account is unregistered or SIP call has failed Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 16 3 The SIP Account Screen The Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and ch
368. on Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic you can change it to a new random number by clicking on a button in the configuration interface When you use the PIN method you must enter the enrollee s PIN into the registrar Then when WPS is activated on the enrollee it presents its PIN to the registrar If the PIN matches the registrar sends the network and security information to the enrollee allowing it to join the network The advantage of using the PIN method rather than the PBC method is that you can ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in the area However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices Take the following steps to set up WPS using the PIN method 352 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 1 Decide which device you want to be the registrar usually the AP and which you want to be the enrollee usually the client 2 Look for the enrollee s WPS PIN it may be displayed on the device If you don t see it log into the enrollee s configuration interface and locate the PIN Select the PIN connection mode not PBC connection mode See the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the Device see Section 6 4 on page 133 3 Log into the configuration utility of the registrar Select the PIN connection mode not the PBC connection mode Locate the place
369. on allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected 168 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 66 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advances Settings Service Select the services unining on pour rrelejcik that inleme wee can aas Serices Pi marisa 122168 1 EG 8618 TEEEH TEP be merneqe 192 18 1 88 3853 27777 UDP msrases 132 168 1 81 7 2B81 325037 UDF e mms 032 1E 1 2 7810 21 711 TCP Figure 67 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings PR Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service a3 Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking 170 the system tray Figure 68 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connected Click here For more information 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An
370. one of the following guidelines 510 13 ASCII keyboard characters 10 to 26 HEX characters containing 0 9 and A F only Longer WEP keys are more secure than short ones WEP Key The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Wireless gt General Basic Static WEP Shared WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose Static WEP or Shared WEP from the drop down list box Select Static WEP to have the Device allow association with wireless clients that use Open System mode Data transfer is encrypted as long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption The Device authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode that have the correct WEP key Select Shared WEP to have the Device authenticate only those wireless clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP key WEP Key Enter a WEP key that will be used to encrypt data Both the Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you want to manually set the WEP key enter any 5 or 13 characters ASCII string or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP key respectively P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 2 3 More Secure WPA 2 PSK The WPA PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP Using a Pre Shared Key PSK both the Device and the connectin
371. only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR PPP Information This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and PPPoE or PPPOA in the WAN Service Type field P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 10 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoA ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Authentication Mode The Device supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your Device accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your Device accepts CHAP only PAP Your Device accepts PAP only MS CHAP Your Device accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP
372. opy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this Lice
373. or subnet 255 255 255 0 Apply Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Routing Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click this to activate this static route Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing Address is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP You can decide if you want to forward packets to a gateway IP address or a bound Address interface If you want to configure Gateway IP Address enter the IP address of the next hop gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Bound Interface You can decide if you want to forward packets to a gateway IP address or a bound interface If you want to configure Bound Interface select the check box and choose an interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the Broadband screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to exit this screen without saving
374. ork You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission 404 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permi
375. ork you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor i
376. ot fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you want to get a dynamic IP address from the ISP IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Routing Feature NAT Enable Select this option to activate NAT on this connection IGMP Proxy Enable Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Apply as Default Gateway Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway DNS Server The section is not available when you select Bridge in the WAN Service Type field Obtain DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure Static DNS IP manually Address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server Secondary DNS Server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 Address This section is not available when you select Disa
377. ot use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord f you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged This product is for indoor use only utilisation int rieure exclusivement Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 7 Safety Warnings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview gk po ool 19 nis pup te T MET M T ME 21 Thtroducno de Web Ble 1 bc Ct Meee eee Rene ee men ast aer o aa RI Ce bes ban te d a dq 27 NMR RT T I LT I E I nesta TE 33 o 79 Connection Status ahd System PIE sssusa nde dab wai doc used rl ud d ad dap ud 81 ijw ser Me 87 Lii M METRO EET E UD IL m Tre 123 lcg TVS S D NE E SS E S o ETE 149 zi
378. ote Your specific Device may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for Windows XP NT 2000 on page 299 Windows Vista on page 303 Windows 7 on page 307 Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 311 Mac OS X 10 5 on page 314 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 318 Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 322 Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 1 2 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 145 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer 27 My Documents 3 Outlook Express E 2 My Recent Documents gt Y Paint a n My Pictures Files and Settings Transfer W E BY Command Prompt c My Music
379. ots or the wireless setting is changed Operating This is the channel currently being used by your AP Channel Security Level Security Mode Select Basic or More Secure to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device When you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See the following sections for more details about wireless security modes Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless 6 2 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 33 Wireless gt General No Security Security Level No Security v v v e The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Wireless gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Level Choose No Security from the sliding bar 6 2 2 Basic Static WEP Sha
380. ould also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is a WAN networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed ATM uses a connection oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit VC between Finding Out More PTM Packet Transfer Mode PTM is packet oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard In PTM packets are encapsulated directly in the High level Data Link Control HDLC frames It is designed to provide a low overhead transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links as an alternative to ATM 3G 3G Third Generation is a digital packet switched wireless technology Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data It allows fast transfer of voice and non voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices IPv6 Introduction IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 10 8 IP addresses The Device can use IPv4 IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and supports IPv6 rapid deployment 6RD IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IP
381. p windows Exceptions IV Load images automatically Exceptions v Enable JavaScript Advanced IV Enable Java r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman Size 16 v Advanced Colors r File Types MUI Configure how Firefox handles certain types of Files Manage Cancel Help P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 337 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 200 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can ac
382. page 91 for more information and connect the WAN port to the broadband modem or router This way you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS Firewall and VolP functions on the Device Computers can connect to the Device s LAN ports or wirelessly Figure 1 Device s Internet Access Application WAN Bridgi PoE s p PPPoE PPPoA o 0 DSL Ethernet 1 2 2 VoIP Features You can register 1 SIP Session Initiation Protocol profile 2 accounts for that profile and use the Device to make and receive VolP telephone calls Figure 2 Device s VoIP Application The Device sends your call to a VolP service provider s SIP server which forwards your calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones 1 2 3 Wireless Connection By default the wireless LAN WLAN is enabled on the Device Once Wireless is enabled IEEE 802 11b g n compliant clients can wirelessly connect to the Device to access network resources 22 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction You can set up a wireless network with WPS WiFi Protected Setup or manually add a client to your wireless network Figure 3 Wireless Connection Application 1 3 The WLAN Button You can use the WLAN ON OFF button on top of the device to turn the wireless LAN on or off You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security Turn the Wireless LAN On or Off 1 Make
383. pe CA El norway telenor net OU Engineering w ca cert pem B Note Maximum 5 certificates can be stored The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Import Certificate Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the Device Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization 0O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Action Click the View icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the Delete icon to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use 15 4 Trusted CA Import Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CA screen to open the Import Certificate screen You can save a trusted certification authority s certificate to the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates
384. pen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain i
385. pplementary phone services in European mode USA Type use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them Contact your VoIP service provider Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the Device Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 16 8 The Call Rule Screen Use this screen to add edit or remove speed dial numbers for outgoing calls Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently used Vol P phone numbers You also have to create speed dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters Once you have configured a speed dial rule you can use a shortcut the speed dial number 01 for example on your phone s keypad to call the phone number P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP To access this screen click Vol P gt Call Rule Figure 107 VoIP gt Call Rule Speed Dial 1 F LE Phone Book Number Description Modify 01 ZW 02 ZW 03 ZW 04 ZW 05 ZW 06 ZW 07 ZW 08 ZW 09 ZW 10 ZW Clear Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 67 VoIP gt Call Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Dial Use this section to create or edit speed dial entries Select the speed dial number you want to use for this phone number Number Enter the SIP number you want the
386. print fields Figure 95 Certificate Details zjx General Details Certification Path Show lt ai gt Value Glenn RSA 1024 Bits Digital Signature Certificate Signingt 3 DNS Names Glenn zw Basic Constraints Subject Type CA Path Length Cons IS Thumbprint algorithm shal S Thumbprint BOA7 22B6 7960 FF92 52F4 6B4C A2 v Lx 4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields The secure method may very based on your situation Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection 15 2 Local Certificates Use this screen to view the Device s summary list of certificates and certification requests You can import the following certificates to your Device Web Server This certificate secures HTTP connections P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates SIP TLS This certificate secures VolP connections SSH SCP SFTP This certificate secures remote connections Click Security Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen Figure 96 Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates Replace PrivateKey Certificate file in PEM format WebServer Eae 3i Browse web pem O ZyXEL CN zyxel com tw O ZyXEL CN zyxel com tw 200910 0r 00 48 07 2015 10 5 00 48 07 9 SSH SCPISFTP Bowe ssh rsa RSA B note SSH SCP SFTP
387. ptinal Only for unlock PIN next time PIN remaining authentication times N A Dial String APN Connection Nailed UP Obtion an IP Address Automatically C Use the following static IP address 34 Obtain DNS info dynamically C Usethe following static DNS IP address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server NENNEN P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Broadband gt 3G Backup LABEL DESCRIPTION 3G Backup Select Enable 3G Backup to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Card Description This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the Device Otherwise it displays N A Username Type the user name of up to 64 ASCII printable characters given to you by your service provider Password Type the password of up to 64 ASCII printable characters associated with the user name above PIN A PIN Personal Identification Number code is a key to a 3G card Without the PIN code you cannot use the 3G card If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication enter the 4 digit PIN code 0000 for example provided by your ISP If you enter the PIN code incorrectly the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet If your ISP disabled PIN code authentica
388. r Ov A network printer or a printer attached to another computer i To set up a network printer that is not attached to a print server J use the Local printer option Select Create a new port and Standard TCP IP Port Click Next Add Printer Wizard Select a Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port O Use the following port Create a new port Type of port Standard TCP IP Port v P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up Click Next to start configuring the printer port Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next Cancel 6 Enter the IP address of the Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address field In our example we use the default IP address of the Device 192 168 1 1 The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port Click Next Note The computer from which you are configuring the TCP IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function Add Standard TCP IP
389. r In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe SIP 2 Register In Active ChangeMe ChangeMe Each field is described in the following table Table 4 System Info Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Language Select the web configurator language from the drop down list box Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Device Information Host Name This field displays the Device system name It is used for identification You can change this in the Maintenance gt System screen s Host Name field Model Name This is the model name of your device MAC Address This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Status and System Info Table4 System Info Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Firmware Version This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device It also shows the date the firmware version was created Go to the Maintenance Firmware Upgrade screen to change it WAN Information Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN LAN Information IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the LAN
390. r DSL provider You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use Network Card Setup General onfiguration Name Ethernet No IP Address for Bonding Devices Dynamic Address DHCP Statically assigned IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Cancel 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned I P Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 187 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings vasrT2Glinux h20z Enter the name for this computer and the DNS domain that it belongs to Optionally enter the name server list and domain search list Note that the hostname is global it applies to all Network Settings f RN Global Options Ov
391. r ISDN e Sweden AnnexA M G 992 5 Annex A and G 992 5 Annex M e TR 100 A 2 22 A 2 23 B3 14 and B 3 15 with FSAN noise FB A 2 20 A 2 21 B3 12 and B 3 13 with AWGN noise ADSL ANSI T1 413 G 992 1 G dmt Annex A G 992 2 G lite Annex A G 994 1 G hs e RE ADSL Reach Extended ADSL ATM e F4 F5 OAM e VC based and LLC based multiplexing e Multi protocol over AAL5 RFC2684 e PPP over ATM AAL5 RFC2364 e ATM QoS CBR VBR rt nrt UBR Upto 7 PVC P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 90 Firmware Specifications continued Other Protocol Support Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols P Multicasting IGMP v1 v2 v3 IGMP Proxy Snooping Management Embedded Web Configurator e CLI Command Line Interpreter Firmware upgrade and configuration file restore through Web FTP SCP SFTP Remote Management Control Telnet FTP Web SSH SCP SFTP and ICMP e Remote Firmware Upgrade e Syslog TR 069 TR 064 Voice Specifications Note To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the Device s phone port you may need to subscribe to the services from your VolP service provider Note Not all features are supported by all service providers Consult your service provider for more information Table 91 Voice Features Voice over IP SIP standard RFC3261 as w
392. r applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Constant Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR Sustainable Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR IP Address This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and I PoE in the WAN Service Type field P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table
393. r assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number registered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device Identity Association An Identity Association IA is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the 5 In IPv6 all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and A TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA NA were obtained a Renew message If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond the client sends a Rebind message to any available server S2 For an IA TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at th
394. r cther input methods Change display language d 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon Figure 152 Windows Vista Network And Internet QU E p Control Panel Network and Internet File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home 7 Network and Sharing Center System and Maintenance ae Security Network and Internet View network computers and devices Internet Options Connect to the Internet Delete browsing history and cockies Hardware and Sound Programs Connect to a network Add a device to the network Change your homepage Lesen ex Set up file sharing Manage browser add ons P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 153 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center QU ER Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center v File Edit View Tools Help i Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network annertinn ar network A ey E Manage network connections TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer K Not connected E 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 154 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center LAN or High Seesd Internat OL Local Collapse group Left Arrow A Conne x ae Ne Expand all groups E Collapse all groups Disable Status
395. r otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance technical or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License you may not market co brand and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party software as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable licen
396. r share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive The Device can function as a print server with an USB printer connected L denotes the PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network line feature The PSTN line lets you have VoIP phone service and PSTN phone service at the same time All PSTN line features documented in this user s guide refer to the L models only When the Device does not have power only the phone connected to the PHONE port 1 can be used for making calls Ensure you know which phone this is so that in case of emergency you can make outgoing calls Models ending in 1 for example P 2812HNU L F1 denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Models ending in 3 for example P 2812HNU L F3 denote a device that works over ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network or T ISDN UR 2 See the chapter on product specifications for a full list of features 1 2 Applications for the Device Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited 1 2 1 Internet Access Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router such as ADSL available you can set the WAN mode to EtherWAN in P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide at Chapter 1 Introduction the Broadband screen see Chapter 5 on
397. r switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista By default Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable IPv6 This P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated IP addresses C N ipv6 install Installing Succeeded C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix TP AJAS S 2X 1B wo Pao a te ee Em LON d e 46 Subnet Mask e Soo ow vo 295 2554255 0 IP Address fe80 2d0 59ff feb8 103c 4 Default Gateway 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Example Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network
398. r with a wireless network card or USB adapter is referred to as the wireless client here We use the M 302 utility screens as the wireless client example The screens may vary for different models 3 3 2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Open the Network Setting gt Wireless gt General screen in the AP s web configurator Wireless Network Setup Wireless M Enable Wireless LAN Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name SSID SSiD Exampe3 Hide SSID BSSID 02 13 49 11 66 8c Mode Select 8021159 Channel Selection Auto z san Operating Channel 6 Security Level More Secure Recommended Security Mode WPA PSK x Enter 8 63 characters a z A Z and 0 9 or 64 hexadecimal digits a f A F and 0 9 Pre Shared Key PaPSkpresharedkey34 more App Cancel 2 Make sure Enable Wireless LAN is selected 3 Enter SSID Example3 as the SSID and select Auto in the Channel Selection field to have the device search for an available channel 4 Select 802 11b g in the Mode Select field 5 Select More Secure as your security level and set security mode to WPA PSK and enter 12MyWPAPSKpresharedkey34 in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply 6 Click Connection Status gt System Info Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device I nformation an
399. rating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITI ONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 387 Appendix G Open Software Announcements 388 A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based
400. ration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide LE Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 43 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL CN X lt f SSID WPA 2 PSK R COMMUNICATION RN WS t Y IAD 6 7 6 3 How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 44 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES A SN um K
401. rce code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to sa
402. rd Click Maintenance User Account to open the following screen Figure 121 Maintenance gt User Account User Name admn Old Password ee New Password NENNEN Retype to Confirm D 1 Bee coal The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Maintenance gt User Account LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name You can configure the password for the Power User and Admin accounts Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the Device Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 19 User Account P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Remote MGMT 20 1 Overview Remote MGMT allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the following interfaces LAN and WLAN WAN only Note The Device is managed using the web configurator 20 1 1 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter TR 064 TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configura
403. rd It is also known as 1x 1xRTT or IS 2000 and considered to be a 2 5G or 2 75G technology 3G Packet UMTS Universal Mobile CDMA2000 EV DO Evolution Data switched Telecommunications System a third Optimized originally 1x Evolution Data generation 3G wireless standard Only also referred to as EV DO EVDO defined in ITU specification is or just EV is an evolution of CDMA2000 sometimes marketed as 3GSM The 1xRTT and enables high speed wireless UMTS uses GSM infrastructures and connectivity It is also denoted as IS W CDMA Wideband Code Division 856 or High Data Rate HDR Multiple Access as the air interface 3 5G Packet HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet switched Access is a mobile telephony protocol used for UMTS based 3G networks and allows for higher data transfer speeds Y Fast A The International Telecommunication Union ITU is an international organization within which governments and the private sector coordinate global telecom networks and services P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Wireless 6 1 Overview This chapter describes the Device s Network Setting Wireless screens Use these screens to set up your Device s wireless connection 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Section 6 2 on page 125 Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless net
404. re WPA 2 PSK WPA 2 to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the Device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication See Section 6 2 1 on page 127 for more details about this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to exit this screen without saving 6 4 The WPS Screen Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your Device WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection between two devices Both devices must support WPS See Section 6 7 6 3 on page 144 for more information about WPS Note The Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile see Section 6 2 on page 125 If you want to use the WPS feature make sure you have set the security mode of SSI D1 to WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Click Network Setting Wireless WPS The following screen displays Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen Figure 39 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS
405. re that is specifically labelled as not being for redistribution check the version message and or README you are not permitted to redistribute that version of the software in any way or form 1 All terms of all other applicable copyrights and licenses must be followed 2 Redistributions of source code must retain the authors copyright notice s this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 3 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors copyright notice s this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 4 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement with the name s of the authors as specified in the copyright notice s substituted where indicated P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements This product includes software developed by the authors which are mentioned at the start of the source files and other contributors 5 Neither the name s of the author s nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO
406. red WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points AP to keep network communications private Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key There are two types of WEP authentication namely Open System Static WEP and Shared Key Shared WEP Open system is implemented for ease of use and when security is not an issue The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share a secret key Thus the wireless stations can associate with any AP or peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the wireless station to the AP or peer computer This requires you to enable the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless station and the AP or peer computer P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 127 Chapter 6 Wireless In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network Settings gt Wireless to display the General screen Select Basic as the security level Then select Static WEP or Shared WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 34 Wireless gt General Basic Static WEP Shared WEP Security Level Basic ___ _ _ _ o bM v v v o Security Mode Static WEP Note The WEP wWired equivalency privacy key is like password that you need to gain access to the network Type your manual WEP key using
407. reen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator If you click LAN Device on the System I nfo screen a in Figure 8 on page 29 the Connection Status screen appears See Chapter 4 on page 81 for more information about the Connection Status screen If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen b in Figure 8 on page 29 a visual graphic appears showing the connection status of the Device s ports The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray Figure 9 Virtual Device Virtual Device Refresh Interval None vll 2 2 3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features The following table describes each menu item Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Connection Status This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers devices connected to it Network Setting Broadband Broadband Use this screen to view and modify your WAN interface You can also configure ISP parameters WAN IP address assignment DNS servers and other advanced properties 3G Backup Use this screen to configure the 3G WAN connection Wireless General Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off specify the SSID s and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication security settings More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device
408. registered URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Broadband 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses the Device s Broadband screens Use these screens to configure your Device for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 13 LAN and WAN 3G third generation standards for the sending and receiving of voice video and data in a mobile environment You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Figure 14 3G WAN Connection P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Broadband screen to view remove or add a WAN interface You can also configure the WAN settings on the ZyXEL Device for Internet access Section 5 2 on page 91 Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection Section 5 3 on page 115 Table 5 WAN Setup Overview LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERNET CONNECTION DSL LINK WAN SERVICE INTERFACE
409. ress or domain name mapping The register server checks your user name and password when you register RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 3550 for details on RTP Pulse Code Modulation Pulse Code Modulation PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call A calls B Table 69 SIP Call Progression A B 1 INVITE die 2 Ringing p 3 OK 4 ACK pee 5 Dialogue voice traffic 6 BYE adi 7 OK P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 237 Chapter 16 VoIP 16 10 3 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing B sends an OK response after the call is answered A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call Now A and B exchange voice media talk After talking A hangs up and sends a BYE request B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated Voice Coding A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals The Device suppor
410. rference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 203 RTS CTS RTS Range CTS Range a re a ren Station AP ACK gasse DE MS E Stations A and B do not _ Station A gt hear each other They xj can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame
411. right law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modificat
412. rk is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License 406 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of t
413. rk of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above
414. rly in Internet Explorer check that J avaScript are allowed P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Figure 194 Internet Options Security Options and then the Security tab Internet Options Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings oe Intemet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet BR This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced 2x r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone Medium Safe browsing and still functional Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level Default E Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Leve OK Cancel 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting Apply 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Figure 195 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting B Acti
415. rnet What wireless security modes does my Device support 278 Wireless security is vital to your network It protects communications between wireless stations access points and the wired network The available security modes in your ZyXEL device are as follows WPA2 PSK recommended This uses a pre shared key with the WPA2 standard WPA PSK This has the device use either WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depending on which security mode the wireless client uses WPA2 WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 27 6 Phone Calls and VoIP The telephone port won t work or the telephone lacks a dial tone 1 Check the telephone connections and telephone wire can access the Internet but cannot make VoIP calls 1 The PHONE light should come on Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port 2 You can also check the VoIP status in the System Info scree
416. roblems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITI ONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks 400 P 281
417. rsion number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI CABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLI ED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT O
418. s e G 722 operates at 48 56 and 64 kbps The Device must use the same codec as the peer When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec Select the Device s first choice for voice coder decoder Select the Device s second choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the Device to accept the first choice Select the Device s third choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the Device to accept the first or second choice Speaking Enter the loudness that the Device uses for speech that it sends to the peer Volume device Control Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Listening Enter the loudness that the Device uses for speech that it receives from the peer Volume device Control Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Active G 168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice Echo reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Cancellation Active VAD Select this if the Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking Voice Active This reduces the bandwidth the Device uses Detector Call Features Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Active Call Select this to enable call transfer on the Device This allows you to transfer an Transfer incoming call that yo
419. s a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the wo
420. s shows the SIP account you are configuring General P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Table 62 SIP Account Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Account Select the Active SI P Account check box if you want to use this account Clear it if you do not want to use this account SIP Account Enter your SIP number In the full SIP URI this is the part before the 9 symbol Number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Authentication Username Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters Password Enter the password for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters URL Type URL Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the Device sends the SIP number SIP include the SIP service domain name TEL do not include the SIP service domain name Voice Features Primary Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want the Device to use Compression Type G 711 provides higher voice quality but requires more bandwidth 64 kbps Secondary e G 711MuLaw is typically used in North America and Japan Compression Type e G 711ALaw is typically used in Europe Third e G 729 only requires 8 kbps Compression Type G 726 32 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbp
421. se along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function mus
422. se terms of such third party and makes no warranty express implied or statutory whatsoever with respect thereto Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXI MUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR
423. secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 107 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
424. sed multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 117 Chapter 5 Broadband separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the se
425. sent through the WAN interface of the Device Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen from the drop down list box Connected Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected Packets Sent Data This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drop This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Packets Received Data This indicates the number of received packets on this interface Error This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drop This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface 18 3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN to open the following screen You can view the LAN traffic statistics in this screen Figure 117 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN Refresh interval Sseconds Interface TU LAN2 LAN3 LANA Wireless Bytes Sent 3027614 0 0 0 2772 Bytes Received 1159174 0 0 0 3322 Interface LANA LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 Wireless Data 11290 0 0 0 28 Sent Packet Error 0 0 0 0 9 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 Data 9452 0 0 0 27 hd Error 0 0 0 0 0 Drop 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 76 System Monitor gt Traffic Status gt LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION
426. server check box 10 Type LP1 in the Queue Name field 68 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 11 Select your Printer Model from the drop down list box If the printer s model is not listed select Generic o0 Printer List IP Printing H Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name Use default queue on server Queue Name LP1 Printer Model Generic Complete and valid address He Cancel Add gt 12 Click Add to select a printer model save and close the Printer List configuration screen ome Printer List IP Printing A Printer s Address 192 168 1 1 Internet address or DNS name C Use default queue on server Complete and valid address Queue Name LP1 Printer Model ESP Model Name EPSON 24 Pin Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON New Stylus Photo Series CUPS v1 1 EPSON Stylus Color Series CUPS v1 1 Ce Cancel Add gt 13 The Name LP1 on 192 168 1 1 displays in the Printer List field The default printer Name displays in bold type 608 Printer List 5 SO Make Default Add Delete Name Status Stylus C43 Stopped LP1 on 192 168 1 1 Your Macintosh print server driver setup is complete You can now use the Device s print server to print from a Macintosh computer P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials
427. sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 13 Broadband Add Edit Bridge ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Maximum Burst Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be Size sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen 5 3 The 3G Backup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings Click Broadband 3G Backup At the time of writing the 3G card you can use in the Device is Huawei E220 E270 E160 E169G Note The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use the signal strength to the service provider s base station and so on If the signal strength of a 3G network is too low the 3G card may switch to an available 2 5G or 2 75G network Refer to Section 5 4 on page 117 for a comparison between 2G 2 5G 2 75G and 3G wireless technologies Figure 29 Broadband gt 3G Backup 3G Backup Enable 3G Backup Card Description N A Username NENNEN Optional Password tS Optional PIN X wqO
428. sh key 253 flashing 253 fragmentation threshold 138 377 frequency range 317 FTP 202 G G 168 229 315 G 711 316 G 729 316 G 992 1 312 G 992 3 312 G 992 5 312 H hidden node 375 host 265 hostname 89 humidity 309 IAD 21 IANA 166 330 IBSS 373 IEEE 802 11g 377 IEEE 802 11g wireless LAN 316 IEEE 802 11i 316 IEEE 802 10 116 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 252 IGMP 117 version 117 IGMP proxy 313 IGMP v1 313 IGMP v2 313 importing trusted CAs 225 Independent Basic Service Set see IBSS initialization vector IV 383 install UPnP 168 Windows Me 168 Windows XP 170 Integrated Access Device see IAD intended audience 3 Internet access 22 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA Internet Service Provider see ISP IP address 90 165 default 29 ping 295 WAN 95 IP Address Assignment 116 IP multicasting 313 IP pool 156 IP pool setup 165 ISP 95 iTunes server 161 ITU T 229 ITU T G 992 1 298 J jitter buffer 315 L LAN 151 and USB printer 163 client list 156 MAC address 157 LAN TCP IP 165 limitations wireless LAN 141 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 417 Index WPS 148 listening port 232 Local Area Network see LAN login passwords 30 logout 30 automatic 30 logs 257 261 277 MAC 89 217 MAC address 157 filler 139 MAC address filtering 217 MAC filter 217 managing the device command interface 25 good habits 26 Tel
429. should configure the SIP service provider and applied for a SIP account 3 5 1 1 SIP Service Provider Configuration Follow the steps below to configure your SIP service provider 1 Make sure your Device is connected to the Internet 2 Open the web configurator 3 Click VolP gt SIP to open the SIP Service Provider screen Select ChangeMe from the Service Provider Selection drop down list box 4 Select the Enable check box of SIP Service Provider and enter ServiceProvider1 as the SIP Service Provider Name Enter the SIP Server Address REGI STER Server Address and SIP Service Domain provided by your ISP accordingly Click Apply SIP Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection General SIP Service Provider SIP Service Provider Name SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain ChangeMe vj elete M Enable SIP Service Provider ServiceProvider1 1025 65535 sip example com 1025 65535 registersip example coi 1025 65535 Isip example com more Apply Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Goto the SIP Account screen click the Edit icon of SIP 1 1 SIP 1 ServiceProvider1 ChangeMe 2 SIP 2 SeniceProvider1 ChangeMe ail 6 Select the Active SIP Account check box then enter the SIP Account Number Username and Password Leave other settings as
430. ss in this field If your WAN Service Type is PPPoE or PPPOA you need to enter this field in order to use 6to4 Tunneling IPv6 DNS Server Select whether you want to obtain the IPv6 DNS server addresses automatically or configure them manually Obtain IPv6 DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Static DNS IPv6 Address Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary IPv6 Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Secondary IPv6 Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS Server Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband 5 2 1 4 Routing PPPoA Click the Add new WAN Interface in the Network Setting gt Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to the connection you want to configure Select ADSL as the interface type Routing as the encapsulation mode and PPPOA as the WAN service type Figure 23 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoA ADSL ATM PVC Configuration General Name Routing Feature Type ADSL xi NAT Enable n Mode Routing IGMP Proxy Enable r WANServiceType PPP overATM PPPOA Apply as Default Gateway r IPV6 IPv4 DualStack Enable DNS Server Obtain DNS i
431. ssive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explici
432. st sometimes get permission to send information to the Device The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device does it cannot communicate with the Device Authentication The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks while a Threshold larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 6 7 2 Wireless Security Overview By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network he or she can steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standards do t
433. st have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842 Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real time multimedia applications 3 The Device does not support pulse dialing at the time of writing P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Type of Service ToS Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS Type of Service values at the data source for example at the Device so a server can decide the best method of delivery that is the least cost fastest route and so on DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCP indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service T
434. stem Preferences eo System Preferences lt gt Y Personal s HO ww M Bo Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware d Gal G Q Y v j W CZ Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse QuickTime Sharing 2 gt BJ Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure Figure 166 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences eoo Network 7 Ca gt show an a Location Automatic Show Network Status zx Built in Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 601 vou are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing is on and is using AirPort to share the AirPort connection 9 1 id Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply Now 312 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab Figure 167 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt TCP IP Tab ead Network 4 Show all Q Location Automatic 5 Show Built in Ethernet TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Etherne
435. stic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP MULTICAST User Defined 2 Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol GRE enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command
436. store Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload FilePath Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be resetto server Reset Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the Device s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your Device is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the Device s current configuration to your computer P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 265 Chapter 25 Backup Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your Device Table 86 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click this to begin
437. subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 29 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 98 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Tit eee a IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 98 Subnet 1 continued IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 99 Subnet 2 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 100 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host
438. sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the WLAN ON OFF button for one second and release it The WLAN WPS LED should change from on to off or vice versa Activate WPS 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the WLAN ON OFF button for more than five seconds and release it Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the Device The WLAN WPS LED should flash while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the wireless device Note You must activate WPS in the Device and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other See Chapter 6 on page 142 for more information P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 4 Ways to Manage the Device Use any of the following methods to manage the Device Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a supported web browser FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore 1 5 Good Habits for Managing the Device Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if
439. t Configure IPv4 Using DHCP iy IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 p i Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure I Pv4 list select Manually In the IP Address field type your IP address In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address n the Router field type the IP address of your device Figure 168 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt Ethernet ean Network lt gt Show all Q Location Automatic Show Built in Ethernet M TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Manually 3 L IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Router 0 0 0 0 DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 2 i U Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 6 Click Apply Now and close the window Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network I nterface from the Info tab Figure 169 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility
440. t C year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode program Copyright C year name of author This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary For mor
441. t Firewall gt Services continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall Change the default password via web configurator Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way Limit who can access your Device Don t enable any local service such as Telnet or FTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces Keep the firewall in a secured locked room Security Considerations Note Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the Device and your protected network Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the I
442. t still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
443. table describes the fields in this screen Table 9 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE ADSL LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select ADSL as the interface that you want to configure The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 9 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Service Type This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select PPPoE as the method of encapsulation used by your ISP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access Configuration IPv6 IPv4 Select Enable to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time If DualStack this function is disabled the Device only runs IPv4 ATM PVC VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit This section is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer 2 interface VPI The valid
444. take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the sou
445. tall and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 401 Appendix G Open Software Announcements The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work 2 Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copy
446. ted by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server This Device has a built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability DNS DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask 7 1 2 2 About UPnP How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN o
447. ter pooling ma __ 5 A Printer Ports window appears Select Standard TCP IP Port and click New Port six Available port types Adobe PDF Port Local Port Microsoft Document Imaging Writer Monitor Network Print Port DOE p ndard TCP IP Port P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard window opens up Click Next to start configuring the printer port Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Welcome to the Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard You use this wizard to add a port for a network printer Before continuing be sure that 1 The device is turned on 2 The network is connected and configured To continue click Next 7 Enter the IP address of the Device to which the printer is connected in the Printer Name or IP Address field In our example we use the default IP address of the Device 192 168 1 1 The Port Name field updates automatically to reflect the IP address of the port Click Next Note The computer from which you are configuring the TCP IP printer port must be on the same LAN in order to use the printer sharing function Enter the Printer Name or IP address and a port name for the desired device Printer Name or IP Address 192 168 1 1 Port Name P 92 168 1 1 Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard f x Add Port RS For which device do you want to add a port NS N
448. that the device is to send to this syslog server Message This field states the reason for the log 17 4 The VoIP Call History Screen Click System Monitor gt Log gt VolP Call History to open the VoIP Call History screen Use this screen to see the details of the calls performed on the Device Figure 115 System Monitor gt Log gt VoIP Call History All Call History v Refresh Clear Logs Local Number Peer Number Interface Duration 1 08 20 2010 09 43 52 128752 1353699 SIP 0 00 00 2 08 20 2010 09 43 07 128752 1353699 SIP 0 00 06 3 08 20 2010 09 42 11 128752 1353699 SIP 0 00 37 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 System Monitor gt Log gt VoIP Call History LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a category of call records to view from the drop down list box select AII Call History to view all call records Refresh Click this to renew the log screen Clear Logs Click this to delete all the logs This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Time This field displays the time the call was recorded Local Number This field displays the phone number you used to make or receive this call Peer Number This field displays the phone number you called or from which this call is made Interface This field displays the type of the cal
449. the users below is required to perform this action E CJ chris gt Details cancel 4 Authenticate Am P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address In the Network Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Connections General ons Hosts G Wired connection Roaming mode enabled E Point to point connec This network interface is not c Connection Settings LL HE IP address Configuration Subnet mask Gateway address Ocene aio In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 180 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt DNS Es Network Settings Connections General DNS Hosts DNS Servers 10023 earch D
450. the PIN Personal Identification Number of the client into the Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless Table 23 Network Setting gt Wireless gt WPS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Register Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the Device WPS Configuration Summary AP PIN The PIN of the Device is shown here Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Click the Generate New PIN button to have the Device create a new PIN Status This displays Configured when the Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Not Configured when there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the Device or you click Release Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release This button is available when the WPS status is Configured Configurat
451. the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password to access the Web Configurator you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Device You could simply restore your last configuration Keep in mind that backing up a configuration file will not back up passwords used to set up PPPoE and VoIP Write down any information your ISP provides you 1 6 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Figure 4 LEDs on the Top of the Device None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION USB1 2 Green On The Device recognizes a USB connection but there is no traffic Blinking The Device is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it Off The Device does not detect a USB connection P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 LED Descriptions continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PHONE1 2 Green On A SIP account is registered for the phone port Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call Orange On A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Blinking A telephone connected to
452. the labels in this screen Table 25 Network Setting gt Wireless gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Select Enable to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your Device Scheduling WLAN status Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN Day Select the day s you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off Between the following times Specify the time period during which to apply the schedule For example you want the wireless network to be only available during work hours Check Mon Fri in the day column and specify 8 00 18 00 in the time table Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 6 7 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth For more information see the appendix P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 137 Chapter 6 Wireless 6 7 1 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device s web configurator Table 26 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through By setting this value lower than the default value the wireless devices mu
453. the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement PRACK method Select Supported or Required to have the Device include a SIP Require Supported header field with the option tag 100rel in all INVITE requests When the Device receives a SIP response message indicating that the phone it called is ringing the Device sends a PRACK message to have both sides confirm the message is received If you select Supported the peer device supports the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably If you select Required the peer device requires the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably Select Disabled to turn off this function Session Timer Select this to have the Device support RFC 4028 RFC 4028 This makes sure that SIP sessions do not hang and the SIP line can always be available for use Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving 16 6 Phone Screen Use this screen to control which SIP accounts and PSTN line each phone uses Click Vol P gt Phone to access the Phone Device screen Figure 104 VolP gt Phone gt Phone Device Analog Phone laia Phone ID Outgoing SIP Number NT 1 Analog Phone 1 ChangeMe 2 Analog Phone 2 ChangeMe P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 VolP gt
454. the remote control ES io x L 1 Videos 2 ZyXEL Celebration Video 3 ZXEL Connecting the Future P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 8 Using the Print Server Feature 2 In this section you can Configure a TCP IP Printer Port Add a New Printer Using Windows Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Configure a TCP IP Printer Port This example shows how you can configure a TCP IP printer port This example is done using the Windows 2000 Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system The TCP IP port must be configured with the IP address of the Device and must use the RAW protocol to communicate with the printer Consult your operating systems documentation for instructions on how to do this or follow the instructions below if you have a Windows 2000 XP operating system Click Start gt Settings then right click on Printers and select Open New Office Document Open Office Document 3i f Set Program Access and Defaults windows Update rh eal rinter Acrobat Distiller WE HP LaserJet 8000 Series PCL 6 WebWorks Rasterizer d Canon iRS000 6000 PCL6 Favorites Gd Adobe PDF d Canon iRS000 6000 PCLSe 3 d Microsoft Office Document Image Writer I PRT403 on zytwptO1 zyxel com Winzip Programs al p Documents s Control Panel e Settings rs Network and Dial up Connections gt SS PRT402 on z
455. tices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix G Open Software Announcements modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software
456. ting IPoE VDSL EtherWAN LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter a service name of the connection Type Select VDSL or EtherWAN as the interface that you want to configure VDSL The Device uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port EtherWAN The Device transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 97 Chapter 5 Broadband Table8 Broadband Add Edit Routing IPoE VDSL EtherWAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Service Type This field is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Select this if you have a username and password for Internet access IP over Ethernet In this type of Internet connection IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment IPv6 IPv4 Select Enable to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time If DualStack this
457. tion leave this field blank Dial String Enter the phone number dial string used to dial up a connection to your service provider s base station Your ISP should provide the phone number For example 99 is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan APN Code Enter the APN Access Point Name provided by your service provider Connections with different APNs may provide different services such as Internet access or MMS Multi Media Messaging Service and charge method You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters Spaces are allowed Connection Select Nailed UP if you do not want the connection to time out Select On Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically disconnects from the ISP Obtain an IP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Address Automatically Use the following Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address static IP address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static I P address Obtain DNS info Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP dynamically automatically Use the following Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure static
458. tion protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user specific parameters such as the username and password SSH SCP SFTP Secure Shell SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network The following file transfer methods use SSH Secure Copy SC is a secure way of transferring files between computers It uses port 22 SSH File Transfer Protocol or Secure File Transfer Protocol SFTP is an old way of transferring files between computers It uses port 22 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Remote MGMT 20 2 The Remote MGMT Screen Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which Device interface Click Maintenance Remote MGMT to open the following screen Figure 122 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT Remote Management HTTPS Enable I Enable 443 HTTP IV Enable Enable 80 TELNET Enable Enable 23 FTP M Enable Enable 21 SSHISCPISFTP Enable Enable 2 ICMP M Enable M Enable NIA TR 064 M Enable NIA 18888 Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 81 Maintenance gt Remote MGMT LABEL DESCRIPTION Services
459. tions of any related service providers Use with products that have NAT and or 3G Do not use the Device for illegal purposes Illegal downloading or sharing of files can result in severe civil and criminal penalties You are subject to the restrictions of copyright laws and any other applicable laws and will bear the consequences of any infringements thereof ZyXEL bears NO responsibility or liability for your use of the download service feature Use for products that have a download service Make sure all data and programs on the Device are also stored elsewhere ZyXEL is not responsible for any loss of or damage to any data programs or storage media resulting from the use misuse or disuse of this or any other ZyXEL product Use for storage backup devices Trademarks This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited Use for STBs that need Rovi certification Certifications Class B Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix H Legal Information This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This d
460. tly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 405 Appendix G Open Software Announcements permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered w
461. to channels 1 through 11 IEEE 802 11n 40MHz operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 3 through 9 EEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 YEE HR RSS A EE E EAE ETR RAUSCH SIREN BEES BS FJERSTH gt ZR massas FH ATA EH ELSE AER aE RE ZR Uu BIRRE 7H Th ERMA Raa o ERE J HRRRI gt RETEBUPRFH gt ASERTE REA e AMABA IRERE L RE ERE BAS SEES E ELSE PHRSR H I E EES L TIR HIRRET HE EES BD TER HAN P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Hu MER or 4 ASAT BE PREF TENEH Appendix H Legal Information Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device is designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz and or 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France Ce produit est concu pour les
462. to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 407 Appendix G Open Software Announcements 408 the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a ve
463. to your Device A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can create a TCP IP port for printing via the network Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer Note Your printer s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer Connect your printer to the Device instead Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device To access this screen click Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Printer Server Figure 57 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Printer Server Print Server Configuration Print Server Enable C Disable Apply Cancel P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 35 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Printer Select Enable to have the Device share a USB printer Server Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings 7 8 Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter LANs WANs and the Device The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN
464. troducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary continued LINK TAB FUNCTION Phone Phone Device Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP accounts Region Use this screen to select your location Call Rule Speed Dial Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often FXO FXO Device Use this screen to set up the PSTN line you use to make regular phone calls System Monitor Log Phone Log Use this screen to view the Device s phone logs VoIP Call History Use this screen to view the Device s VoIP call history Traffic Status WAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the Device LAN Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the Device NAT Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the Device 3G Backup Use this screen to view the status of 3G Backup on the Device VoIP Status VoIP Status Use this screen to view the SIP phone and call status of the Device Maintenance Users Account Users Account Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts Remote MGMT Remote MGMT Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services System System Use this screen to configure the Device s name domain name management inactivity time out T
465. ts 163 TCP IP port 61 product registration 426 profile 45 protocol 95 PSK 383 PSTN call setup signaling 251 pulse dialing 251 Push Button Configuration see PBC push button WPS 143 Q QoS 187 188 198 251 315 Quality of Service 315 Quality of Service see QoS quick dialing 316 Quick Start Guide 29 R RADIUS 317 379 message types 379 messages 379 shared secret key 380 RADIUS server 140 Reach Extended ADSL 312 Real time Transport Protocol see RTP region 314 registration product 426 reinitialize the ADSL line 298 related documentation 3 REN 315 Request To Send see RTS reset 293 RESET button 28 restart 293 restoring configuration 292 RFC 1483 113 312 RFC 1631 201 RFC 1889 249 316 RFC 1890 316 RFC 2327 316 RFC 2364 312 RFC 2516 311 312 RFC 2684 312 RFC 3261 316 Ringer Equivalence Number see REN router features 22 RTCP 316 RTP 249 316 RTS Request To Send 376 threshold 375 376 RTS threshold 138 S safety warnings 7 scan 125 scheduling wireless LAN 137 SDP 316 seamless rate adaptation 312 security wireless LAN 138 security network 215 service access control 270 Service Set 124 133 Session Description Protocol 316 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP silence suppression 228 315 SIP 245 account 245 accounts 315 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Index ALG 316 Application Layer Gateway 316 call progression 249 cient 247 identiti
466. ts the following codecs G 711 is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM waveform codec PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples G 711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth G 726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction the less space needed to describe it G 726 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps e G 729 is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps PSTN Call Setup Signaling Dual Tone MultiFrequency DTMF signaling uses pairs of frequencies one lower frequency and one higher frequency to set up calls It is also known as Touch Tone Each of the keys on a DTMF telephone corresponds to a different pair of frequencies Pulse dialing sends a series of clicks to the local phone office in order to dial numbers MWI Message Waiting Indication Enable Message Waiting Indication MWI enables your phone to give you a message waiting beeping dial tone when you have a voice message s Your VoIP service provider mu
467. ts to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 355 Appendix D Wireless LANs is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing information Figure 208 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR QD P SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 Oo In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it a
468. tware Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights w
469. twork the fields in this screen remain blank Wireless Network Status Statistics Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps Network Name SSID 55ID Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps AP MAC Address 00 AD C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11g Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength Seeeeeece Link Quality 9 9 0 09 9 9 0 0 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured If you cannot access the web site try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen check the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator 3 3 3 2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you easily connect to the same wireless network again later You can also configure different profiles for different networks for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an AP configured for WPA PSK security In this example the SSID is SSID Example3 the profile name is PN Example3 and the pre shared key is You have chosen the profile name PN Example3 Open the ZyXEL utility and click
470. ty Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption than TKI P TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 347 Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match
471. u have answered to another phone P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 227 Chapter 16 VoIP Table 62 SIP Account Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Call Select this to enable call waiting on the Device This allows you to place a call on Waiting hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number Active Call Specify a time of seconds that the Device waits before rejecting the second call if Waiting Reject you do not answer it Time Active Select this if you want the Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified Unconditional phone number Forward k Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right Active Busy Select this if you want the Device to forward incoming calls to the specified Forward phone number if the phone port is busy Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right If you have call waiting the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call Active No Answer Select this if you want the Device to forward incoming calls to the specified Forward phone number if the call is unanswered See No Answer Time Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right No Answer Ring This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature Time Enter the number of seconds the Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call befor
472. uld type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 23 1 Overview You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the Device records in the Log Setting screen shown 23 2 The Log Setting Screen To change your Device s log settings click Maintenance Log Setting The screen appears as Figure 125 Maintenance gt Log Setting Log Setting
473. ultiple voice channels telephone Channels calls Additionally you can answer an incoming phone call on a VoIP account even while someone else is using the account for a phone call Call waiting This feature allows you to hear an alert when you are already using the phone and another person calls you You can then either reject the new incoming call put your current call on hold and receive the new incoming call or end the current call and receive the new incoming call P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Product Specifications Table 91 Voice Features continued Call forwarding With this feature you can set the Device to forward calls to a specified number either unconditionally always when your number is busy or when you do not answer You can also forward incoming calls from one specified number to another QoS Quality of Quality of Service QoS mechanisms help to provide better service on a per Service flow basis Your device supports Type of Service ToS tagging and Differentiated Services DiffServ tagging This allows the device to tag voice frames so they can be prioritized over the network Other Voice SIP version 2 Session Initiation Protocol RFC 3261 Features SDP Session Description Protocol RFC 2327 3264 4566 RTP RTCP RFC 3550 Voice codecs coder decoders G 711 G 729ab G 722 G 726 Fax and data modem discrimination DTMF Detection and Generation DTMF In band an
474. umber the higher the priority level Enter 802 1Q VLAN Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection ID PPP Information This section is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field and PPPoE in the WAN Service Type field PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above PPPoE Service Type the name of your PPPoE service here Name Authentication The Device supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Mode Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your Device accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your Device accepts CHAP only e PAP Your Device accepts PAP only e MS CHAP Your Device accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 7 Broadband Add Edit Routing PPPoE VDSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Static IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address Address is n
475. ur computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Reserve Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box es in each entry to have the Device always assign the selected entry ies s IP address es to the corresponding MAC address es and host name s You can select up to 128 entries in this table Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen the following screen displays Figure 50 Static DHCP Add MAC Address IP Address Pe The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Static DHCP Add LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN IP Address Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify 154 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Table 30 Static DHCP Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply C
476. ure multiple Basic Service Sets BSSs on the Device Click Network Settings gt Wireless gt More AP The following screen displays Figure 37 Network Settings gt Wireless gt More AP 2 ZyXEL_668D WPA2 PSK mixed 3 ZyXEL 668E WPA2 PSK mixed 4 ZyXEL_668F WPA2 PSK mixed P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Network Settings gt Wireless gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry Active This field indicates whether this SSID is active A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active SSID An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device s BSSs The SSID Service Set IDentifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility Security This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile 6 3 1 Edit More AP Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen The following screen displays Figure 38 Wireless gt More AP Edit Wireless Network
477. used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix E on page 359 Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 10 0 0 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 82 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 10 0 0 33 LAN WAN B 10 0 0 34 INTERNEJ IP Address assigned by ISP C 10 0 0 35 D 10 0 0 36 10 2 1 The Port Forwarding Screen Click Network Setting gt NAT to open the Port Forwarding screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT See Appendix E on page 359 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 83 Network Setting gt NAT gt Port Forwarding Add new rule User WA M ar 1 i Defined FihenWAN1 21 21 21 21 192 168 1 6 TCP 4 W B note The TCP port 30005 is r
478. ute the software For at least three 3 years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support Support zyxel com tw for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution a complete machine readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Bridge utils br2684ctl Busybox Dnsmasq Ebtables gettext gmpproxy Iproute2 Iptables libmcrypt linux atm linuxigd logrotate MIPS linux kernel Mtd utils P910nd Ppp Samba Syslog ng Sysstat Updatedd usb modeswitch Usbmount Wireless tools and ntpclient under below GPL license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LI CENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to
479. uter to advertise its presence and other parameters IPv6 Cache An IPv6 host is required to have a neighbor cache destination cache prefix list and default router list The Device maintains and updates its IPv6 caches constantly using the information from response messages In IPv6 the Device configures a link local address automatically and then sends a neighbor solicitation message to check if the address is unique If there is an address to be resolved or verified the Device also sends out a neighbor solicitation message When the Device receives a neighbor advertisement in response it stores the neighbor s link layer address in the neighbor cache When the Device uses a router solicitation message to query for a router and receives a router advertisement message it adds the router s information to the neighbor cache prefix list and destination cache The Device creates an entry in the default router list cache if the router can be used as a default router When the Device needs to send a packet it first consults the destination cache to determine the next hop If there is no matching entry in the destination cache the Device uses the prefix list to determine whether the destination address is on link P 2612HNU Fx User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 and can be reached directly without passing through a router If the address is unlink the address is considered as the next hop Otherwise the Device determines the next hop from th
480. v6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a25 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a25 0015 0000 0000 1a2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a25b 15 0 0 1a2f 0 Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2f 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1a2 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1la2f 0015 2001 db8 1a2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 1a2 15 IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1a2 0 32 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix IPv6 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example
481. vailable only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest IP Protocol This field is available only when you select I P in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP or UDP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number IP Packet This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Length Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 46 to 1504 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field and UDP in the IP Protocol field Select this option and select a DHCP option If you select Vendor Class I D DHCP Option 60 enter the Class ID of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select Clientl D DHCP Option 61 enter the Type of the matched traffic and Client I D of the DHCP client If you select User Class I
482. ve scripting E Allow paste operations via script Q Disable 9 Enable Prompt 8 Scripting of Java applets Q Disable Prompt Fleece mn af Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset ced Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 UnderJava permissions make sure that a safety level is selected P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 196 Security Settings Java Security Settings A4 xl Settings O Disable 9 Enable i Font download Q Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt 3 Microsoft YM Er Java permissions Custom 2 Disable Jav 9 High safety Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium i Reset caes JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 197 Java Sun Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP for firewall and
483. way Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway DNS Server This is available only when you select Apply as Default Gateway in the Routing Feature field Obtain DNS info Automatically Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure Static DNS IP manually Address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP Server Secondary DNS Server Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 Address This section is not available when you select Disable in the I Pv6 I Pv4 DualStack field Obtain I Pv6 Address Automatically Select this option if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an IPv6 address Enable Prefix Delegation Select this to enable Prefix Delegation This enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN Static I Pv6 Address Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP using colon hexadecimal notation Prefix length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP
484. way an e mail address identifies an e mail account The format of a SIP identity is SIP Number 9SI P Service Domain SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the symbol A SIP number can use letters like in an e mail address johndoe your ITSP com for example or numbers like a telephone number 1122334455 9 Vol P provider com for example SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI For example if the SIP address is 1122334455 9 Vol P provider com then Vol P provider com is the SIP service domain SIP Registration Each Device is an individual SIP User Agent UA To provide voice service it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents as well as its current IP address for the routing of incoming SIP requests After successful registration the SIP server knows that the users identified by their dedicated SIP URIs are represented by the UA and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 16 VoIP Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client UAC running in the VoIP gateway the Device The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER messag
485. where you can enter the enrollee s PIN if you are using the Device see Section 6 4 on page 133 Enter the PIN from the enrollee device 4 Activate WPS on both devices within two minutes Note Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself 5 On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 353 Appendix D Wireless LANs The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 206 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL m 4 D 6 SSID WPA 2 PSK COMMUNICATION 6 How WPS Works When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA
486. whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or emb
487. wo things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess for example a three letter word from the dictionary Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place 138 P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Wireless A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure
488. works on your Device Section 6 3 on page 131 Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS view or generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number Section 6 4 on page 133 Use the WMM screen to enable Wi Fi MultiMedia WMM to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications Section 6 5 on page 135 Use the Scheduling screen to schedule a time period for the wireless LAN to operate each day Section 6 6 on page 137 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection For example you may just want to set up a network name a wireless radio channel and some security in the General screen 6 1 2 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one of two ways An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order
489. written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCI DENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTI ON HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 397 Appendix G Open Software Announcements The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or gerivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence This Product includes radvd under the following License The author s grant permission for redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are met 0 If you receive a version of the softwa
490. x is selected choose an automapping type to assign traffic priority automatically Apply Cancel Go to Network Setting gt QoS gt Queue Setup Click Add new Queue to create a new queue In the screen that opens check Active and enter or select the following values then click Apply Name Email Priority 7 High Weight 15 Rate Limit 5 000 kbps IV Active Name Emait Interface wan E Priority 7 High v Weight psm Rate Limit Boo kbps omn te P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Go to Network Setting gt QoS gt Class Setup Click Add new Classifier to create a new class Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below Then click Apply Class Configuration Active Class Name Classification Order Forward To Interface Junchange zl DSCP Mark Unmane szl 0 83 802 1P Mark To Queue Email b Criteria Configuration Use the configurations below to specify the characteristics of a data flow need to be managed by this QoS rule Basic MV From Interface Lan X Iv Ether Type iP 0x0800 Source Iv MAC Address PAFFAAFE AAFF MAC Mask CL 1 r Exclude IV IP Address o2368123 IP SubnetMask 255 255 2550 r Exclude Port Range E E Exclude Destination MAC Address J MAC Mask a E Exclude IP Address IPSubnetMask l a Exclude Port Range E r Exclude
491. xes BAE Ar Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q O 2 Address B Printers and Faxes v amp g Go i i i Acrobat Adobe PDF Microsoft Microsoft XPS PRT402 on PDF Writer Office Doc Document zytwpt l Sp Set up faxing See Also PRT4050n WebWorks zytwpt 1 Rasterizer 2 Troubleshoot printing 9 Get help with printing Other Places G Control Panel 3 Scanners and Cameras L My Documents B My Pictures 7 My Computer 2 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays Click Next Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Q Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections 2 If you have a Plug and Play printer that connects J through a USB port or any other hot pluggable port such as IEEE 1384 infrared and so on you do not need to use this wizard Click Cancel to close the wizard and then plug the printer s cable into your computer or point the printer toward your computer s infrared port and turn the printer on Windows will automatically install the printer for you To continue click Next P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 4 Select Local printer attached to this computer and click Next Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up Select the option that describes the printer you want to use C Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printe
492. xpire or has already expired Cert Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save SSH SCP SFTP Type in the location of the SSH SCP SFTP certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Choose file Click this link to find the certificate file you want to upload Current File This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Key Type This field applies to the SSH SCP SFTP certificate This shows the file format of the current certificate Replace Click this to replace the certificate s and save your changes back to the Device Reset Click this to clear your settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Certificates 15 3 Trusted CA Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as trusted The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen Figure 97 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CA Import Certificate Name Type CN CPE Norway C NO L Fornebu O Telenor emailAddress c
493. y a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 379 Appendix G Open Software Announcements 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the ter
494. y as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 139 192 168 1 16 Network Number and Host ID r T p i i i I i n n I I H i n n a a n m m m m m m m um 9 How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 th
495. y saved settings 7 3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 7 3 1 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the Static DHCP screen P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Home Networking Use this screen to change your Device s static DHCP settings Click Network Setting Home Networking gt Static DHCP to open the following screen Figure 49 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP Add new static lease Status Host Name MAC Address IP Address Reserve 1 twpc13774 02 00 24 21 7e 20 96 192 168 1 58 O Apply Cancel Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Network Setting gt Home Networking gt Static DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Add new static Click this to add a new static DHCP entry lease This is the index number of the entry Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device Host Name This field displays the client host name MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to yo
496. you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network
497. you how the media server feature works using the following media clients Microsoft MS Windows Media Player Media Server works with Windows Vista and Windows 7 Make sure your computer is able to play media files music videos and pictures ZyXEL DMA 2500 a digital media adapter You need to set up the DMA 2500 to work with your television TV Refer to the DMA 2500 Quick Start Guide for the correct hardware connections Before you begin connect the USB storage device containing the media files you want to play to the USB port of your Device 3 7 1 Configuring the Device Note The Media Server feature is enabled by default To use your Device as a media server click Network Setting Home Networking Media Server M Enable Media Server env Check Enable Media Server and click Apply This enables DLNA compliant media clients to play the video music and image files in your USB storage device 3 7 2 Using Windows Media Player This section shows you how to play the media files on the USB storage device connected to your Device using Windows Media Player USB Storage Device 1 T TER T Eyl Computer with Windows Media Player ZyXEL Device P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Windows Vista 1 Open Windows Media Player and click Library gt Media Sharing as follows E Windows Media Player Now Playing Library ti Burn ee Create Playlist
498. you want to configure here The Device uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Broadband Table 13 Broadband Add Edit Bridge ADSL continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP s DHCP server directly If you select Bridge you cannot use routing functions such as QoS Firewall DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port s Bridge Group Select the LAN WLAN port s from which traffic will be forwarded to the WAN interface directly Select a port from the Available LAN WLAN Port s list and click Add gt gt to add it to the Bridged LAN WLAN Port s list If you want to remove a port from the Bridged LAN WLAN Port s list select it and click Remove You cannot configure a QoS class for traffic from the LAN port which is selected here ATM PVC Configuration VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit This section is available only when you select ADSL in the Type field to configure an ATM layer 2 interface VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assign
499. your changes Cancel Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT 10 2 2 The Port Forwarding Edit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen Figure 84 Port Forwarding Add Edit M Enable Service Name WAN Interface Start Port End Port Translation Start Port Translation End Port Server IP Address Protocol v ser Defined EtherWAN1 192 168 1 6 TCP z Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Port Forwarding Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable This is available only in the Edit screen Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters A Z a z 1 2 and so on WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled Start Port Enter the original destination port for the packets To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field
500. your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your Device filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 10 4 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Network Address Translation NAT Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 86 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Add ieee IP Address a WA N 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1
501. ypes DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide 187 Chapter 9 Quality of Service QoS 188 negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traf
502. ytwpto1 zyxel com N Search g 1 Printers PSON Stylus C45 Series 9 Help A Taskbar amp Start Menu gi Run y Shut Down Start The Printers folder opens up First you need to open up the properties windows for the printer you want to configure a TCP IP port Locate your printer P 2812HNU L Fx Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Right click on your printer and select Properties i Printers File Edit View Favorites Tools Help dens b c E Qsearch Gyrolders 4 A UI X a Eg mws ames 7000000000000 a Add Printer Gf Acrobat Distiller 0 Ready Printers Qf Adobe PDF 0 Ready Gili Canon iR5000 6000 PCLSe 0 Ready EPSON Stylus C45 Series 0 Ready Documents 0 Status Ready Model EPSON Stylus C45 Series Waiting Time Q EPSON Support Windows 2000 Support 4 Select the Ports tab and click Add Port f EPSON Stylus C45 Series Properties E 2 x Color Management Speuih ersion Information General Sharing Pots Advanced SS EPSON Stylus C45 Series Print to the following ports Documents will print to the first free checked port LlLPTi Printer Port WebWorks Rasterizer Cano COLPT2 Printer Port COLPT3 Printer Port COCOM1 Serial Port LlCOM2 Serial Port COCOM3 Serial Port LlCOM amp Serial Port zl Add Port Delete Port Configure Pott v Enable bidirectional support Enable prin

manual - SWS, a.s.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents